OLD | NEW |
(Empty) | |
| 1 % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
| 2 % |
| 3 % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. |
| 4 \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi |
| 5 % |
| 6 \def\texinfoversion{2008-12-03.17} |
| 7 % |
| 8 % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, |
| 9 % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, |
| 10 % 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 11 % |
| 12 % This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or |
| 13 % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as |
| 14 % published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the |
| 15 % License, or (at your option) any later version. |
| 16 % |
| 17 % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be |
| 18 % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty |
| 19 % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU |
| 20 % General Public License for more details. |
| 21 % |
| 22 % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
| 23 % along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. |
| 24 % |
| 25 % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing |
| 26 % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without |
| 27 % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) |
| 28 % |
| 29 % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug |
| 30 % reports; you can get the latest version from: |
| 31 % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or |
| 32 % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex |
| 33 % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). |
| 34 % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out |
| 35 % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. |
| 36 % |
| 37 % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a |
| 38 % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the |
| 39 % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. |
| 40 % |
| 41 % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the |
| 42 % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple |
| 43 % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: |
| 44 % tex foo.texi |
| 45 % texindex foo.?? |
| 46 % tex foo.texi |
| 47 % tex foo.texi |
| 48 % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. |
| 49 % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. |
| 50 % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more |
| 51 % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. |
| 52 % |
| 53 % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some |
| 54 % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the |
| 55 % full Texinfo distribution. |
| 56 % |
| 57 % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. |
| 58 |
| 59 |
| 60 \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} |
| 61 |
| 62 % If in a .fmt file, print the version number |
| 63 % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because |
| 64 % they might have appeared in the input file name. |
| 65 \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% |
| 66 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} |
| 67 |
| 68 |
| 69 \chardef\other=12 |
| 70 |
| 71 % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. |
| 72 % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. |
| 73 \let\+ = \relax |
| 74 |
| 75 % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. |
| 76 \let\ptexb=\b |
| 77 \let\ptexbullet=\bullet |
| 78 \let\ptexc=\c |
| 79 \let\ptexcomma=\, |
| 80 \let\ptexdot=\. |
| 81 \let\ptexdots=\dots |
| 82 \let\ptexend=\end |
| 83 \let\ptexequiv=\equiv |
| 84 \let\ptexexclam=\! |
| 85 \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
| 86 \let\ptexgtr=> |
| 87 \let\ptexhat=^ |
| 88 \let\ptexi=\i |
| 89 \let\ptexindent=\indent |
| 90 \let\ptexinsert=\insert |
| 91 \let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
| 92 \let\ptexless=< |
| 93 \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite |
| 94 \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent |
| 95 \let\ptexplus=+ |
| 96 \let\ptexrbrace=\} |
| 97 \let\ptexslash=\/ |
| 98 \let\ptexstar=\* |
| 99 \let\ptext=\t |
| 100 \let\ptextop=\top |
| 101 {\catcode`\'=\active |
| 102 \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex. |
| 103 |
| 104 % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it |
| 105 % starts a new line in the output. |
| 106 \newlinechar = `^^J |
| 107 |
| 108 % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error |
| 109 % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. |
| 110 % |
| 111 \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined |
| 112 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. |
| 113 \else |
| 114 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} |
| 115 \fi |
| 116 |
| 117 % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. |
| 118 \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi |
| 119 \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi |
| 120 \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi |
| 121 \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi |
| 122 \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty
)}\fi |
| 123 \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is n
onexistent)}\fi |
| 124 \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi |
| 125 \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instanc
e Variable of}\fi |
| 126 \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi |
| 127 \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi |
| 128 \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi |
| 129 \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi |
| 130 \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi |
| 131 \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi |
| 132 \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi |
| 133 \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi |
| 134 \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi |
| 135 \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi |
| 136 \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi |
| 137 % |
| 138 \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi |
| 139 \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi |
| 140 \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi |
| 141 \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi |
| 142 \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi |
| 143 \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi |
| 144 \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi |
| 145 \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi |
| 146 \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi |
| 147 \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi |
| 148 \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi |
| 149 \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi |
| 150 % |
| 151 \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi |
| 152 \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi |
| 153 \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi |
| 154 \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi |
| 155 \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi |
| 156 |
| 157 % Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful. |
| 158 \chardef\spacecat = 10 |
| 159 \def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat} |
| 160 |
| 161 % sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences. |
| 162 \chardef\colonChar = `\: |
| 163 \chardef\commaChar = `\, |
| 164 \chardef\dashChar = `\- |
| 165 \chardef\dotChar = `\. |
| 166 \chardef\exclamChar= `\! |
| 167 \chardef\lquoteChar= `\` |
| 168 \chardef\questChar = `\? |
| 169 \chardef\rquoteChar= `\' |
| 170 \chardef\semiChar = `\; |
| 171 \chardef\underChar = `\_ |
| 172 |
| 173 % Ignore a token. |
| 174 % |
| 175 \def\gobble#1{} |
| 176 |
| 177 % The following is used inside several \edef's. |
| 178 \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} |
| 179 |
| 180 % Hyphenation fixes. |
| 181 \hyphenation{ |
| 182 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script |
| 183 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps |
| 184 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script |
| 185 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm |
| 186 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces |
| 187 spell-ing spell-ings |
| 188 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space |
| 189 wide-spread wrap-around |
| 190 } |
| 191 |
| 192 % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. |
| 193 \newdimen\bindingoffset |
| 194 \newdimen\normaloffset |
| 195 \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
| 196 |
| 197 % For a final copy, take out the rectangles |
| 198 % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided |
| 199 % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). |
| 200 % |
| 201 \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} |
| 202 |
| 203 % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should |
| 204 % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the |
| 205 % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would |
| 206 % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main |
| 207 % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). |
| 208 % |
| 209 \def\|{% |
| 210 % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. |
| 211 \leavevmode |
| 212 % |
| 213 % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. |
| 214 \vadjust{% |
| 215 % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current |
| 216 % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. |
| 217 \vskip-\baselineskip |
| 218 % |
| 219 % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So |
| 220 % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. |
| 221 \llap{% |
| 222 % |
| 223 % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. |
| 224 \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt |
| 225 % |
| 226 % This is the space between the bar and the text. |
| 227 \hskip 12pt |
| 228 }% |
| 229 }% |
| 230 } |
| 231 |
| 232 % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
| 233 % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, |
| 234 % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make |
| 235 % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log |
| 236 % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. |
| 237 % |
| 238 \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% |
| 239 \def\loggingall{% |
| 240 \tracingstats2 |
| 241 \tracingpages1 |
| 242 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex |
| 243 \tracingparagraphs1 |
| 244 \tracingoutput1 |
| 245 \tracingmacros2 |
| 246 \tracingrestores1 |
| 247 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen |
| 248 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging |
| 249 \tracingscantokens1 |
| 250 \tracingifs1 |
| 251 \tracinggroups1 |
| 252 \tracingnesting2 |
| 253 \tracingassigns1 |
| 254 \fi |
| 255 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex |
| 256 \errorcontextlines16 |
| 257 }% |
| 258 |
| 259 % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing |
| 260 % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. |
| 261 % |
| 262 \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount |
| 263 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} |
| 264 \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount |
| 265 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} |
| 266 \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount |
| 267 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} |
| 268 |
| 269 % For @cropmarks command. |
| 270 % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. |
| 271 % |
| 272 \newif\ifcropmarks |
| 273 \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue |
| 274 % |
| 275 % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. |
| 276 % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 |
| 277 % |
| 278 \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines |
| 279 \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc |
| 280 \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt |
| 281 \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in |
| 282 |
| 283 % Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. |
| 284 % We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. |
| 285 % This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. |
| 286 % |
| 287 % A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. |
| 288 % \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. |
| 289 % |
| 290 % Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter |
| 291 % (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top |
| 292 % of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is |
| 293 % described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two |
| 294 % marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and |
| 295 % one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK... |
| 296 \def\domark{% |
| 297 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% |
| 298 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% |
| 299 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% |
| 300 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% |
| 301 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% |
| 302 \mark{% |
| 303 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 |
| 304 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 |
| 305 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 |
| 306 }% |
| 307 } |
| 308 % \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title |
| 309 % page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us |
| 310 % the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., |
| 311 % @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very |
| 312 % first @chapter. |
| 313 \def\gettopheadingmarks{% |
| 314 \ifcase0\topmark\fi |
| 315 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi |
| 316 } |
| 317 \def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} |
| 318 \def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} |
| 319 |
| 320 % Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. |
| 321 \def\lastchapterdefs{} |
| 322 \def\lastsectiondefs{} |
| 323 \def\prevchapterdefs{} |
| 324 \def\prevsectiondefs{} |
| 325 \def\lastcolordefs{} |
| 326 |
| 327 % Main output routine. |
| 328 \chardef\PAGE = 255 |
| 329 \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} |
| 330 |
| 331 \newbox\headlinebox |
| 332 \newbox\footlinebox |
| 333 |
| 334 % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents |
| 335 % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. |
| 336 \def\onepageout#1{% |
| 337 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi |
| 338 % |
| 339 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset |
| 340 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi |
| 341 % |
| 342 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in |
| 343 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). |
| 344 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi |
| 345 \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% |
| 346 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi |
| 347 \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% |
| 348 % |
| 349 {% |
| 350 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to |
| 351 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends |
| 352 % before the \shipout runs. |
| 353 % |
| 354 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. |
| 355 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if |
| 356 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. |
| 357 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: |
| 358 % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} |
| 359 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; |
| 360 % it needs to be |
| 361 % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym} |
| 362 \shipout\vbox{% |
| 363 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. |
| 364 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi |
| 365 % |
| 366 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup |
| 367 \hsize = \outerhsize |
| 368 \vskip-\topandbottommargin |
| 369 \vtop to0pt{% |
| 370 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% |
| 371 \nointerlineskip |
| 372 \line{% |
| 373 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% |
| 374 \hfill |
| 375 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% |
| 376 }% |
| 377 \vss}% |
| 378 \vskip\topandbottommargin |
| 379 \line\bgroup |
| 380 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. |
| 381 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi |
| 382 \vbox\bgroup |
| 383 \fi |
| 384 % |
| 385 \unvbox\headlinebox |
| 386 \pagebody{#1}% |
| 387 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt |
| 388 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. |
| 389 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) |
| 390 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. |
| 391 \vskip 24pt |
| 392 \unvbox\footlinebox |
| 393 \fi |
| 394 % |
| 395 \ifcropmarks |
| 396 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup |
| 397 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup |
| 398 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill |
| 399 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick |
| 400 \vbox to0pt{\vss |
| 401 \line{% |
| 402 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% |
| 403 \hfill |
| 404 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% |
| 405 }% |
| 406 \nointerlineskip |
| 407 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% |
| 408 }% |
| 409 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause |
| 410 \fi |
| 411 }% end of \shipout\vbox |
| 412 }% end of group with \indexdummies |
| 413 \advancepageno |
| 414 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi |
| 415 } |
| 416 |
| 417 \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen |
| 418 |
| 419 \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} |
| 420 {\catcode`\@ =11 |
| 421 \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi |
| 422 % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) |
| 423 \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present |
| 424 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi |
| 425 \dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax |
| 426 \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi |
| 427 \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} |
| 428 } |
| 429 |
| 430 % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are |
| 431 % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize |
| 432 % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
| 433 % |
| 434 \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} |
| 435 \def\nstop{\vbox |
| 436 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} |
| 437 \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} |
| 438 \def\nsbot{\vbox |
| 439 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} |
| 440 |
| 441 % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of |
| 442 % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a |
| 443 % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. |
| 444 % |
| 445 \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} |
| 446 \def\parseargusing#1#2{% |
| 447 \def\argtorun{#2}% |
| 448 \begingroup |
| 449 \obeylines |
| 450 \spaceisspace |
| 451 #1% |
| 452 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. |
| 453 } |
| 454 |
| 455 {\obeylines % |
| 456 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% |
| 457 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. |
| 458 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% |
| 459 }% |
| 460 } |
| 461 |
| 462 % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. |
| 463 \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} |
| 464 \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} |
| 465 |
| 466 % Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. |
| 467 % |
| 468 % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., |
| 469 % @end itemize @c foo |
| 470 % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed |
| 471 % by \finishparsearg. |
| 472 % |
| 473 \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} |
| 474 \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} |
| 475 \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% |
| 476 \def\temp{#3}% |
| 477 \ifx\temp\empty |
| 478 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: |
| 479 \let\temp\finishparsearg |
| 480 \else |
| 481 \let\temp\argcheckspaces |
| 482 \fi |
| 483 % Put the space token in: |
| 484 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm |
| 485 } |
| 486 |
| 487 % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so |
| 488 % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. |
| 489 % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, |
| 490 % just before passing the control to \argtorun. |
| 491 % (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is |
| 492 % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger |
| 493 % that a pair of braces would be stripped. |
| 494 % |
| 495 % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. |
| 496 % |
| 497 \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} |
| 498 |
| 499 % \parseargdef\foo{...} |
| 500 % is roughly equivalent to |
| 501 % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} |
| 502 % \def\Xfoo#1{...} |
| 503 % |
| 504 % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my |
| 505 % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 |
| 506 |
| 507 \def\parseargdef#1{% |
| 508 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% |
| 509 } |
| 510 \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% |
| 511 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% |
| 512 \def#1##1% |
| 513 } |
| 514 |
| 515 % Several utility definitions with active space: |
| 516 { |
| 517 \obeyspaces |
| 518 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } |
| 519 |
| 520 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword |
| 521 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this |
| 522 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input |
| 523 % should produce a line of output anyway. |
| 524 % |
| 525 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} |
| 526 |
| 527 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces |
| 528 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the |
| 529 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). |
| 530 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} |
| 531 } |
| 532 |
| 533 |
| 534 \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} |
| 535 |
| 536 % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: |
| 537 % |
| 538 % \envdef\foo{...} |
| 539 % \def\Efoo{...} |
| 540 % |
| 541 % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the |
| 542 % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also |
| 543 % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks |
| 544 % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be |
| 545 % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. |
| 546 % |
| 547 % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they |
| 548 % are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The |
| 549 % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this |
| 550 % special case.) |
| 551 |
| 552 |
| 553 % At run-time, environments start with this: |
| 554 \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} |
| 555 % initialize |
| 556 \let\thisenv\empty |
| 557 |
| 558 % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': |
| 559 \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} |
| 560 \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} |
| 561 |
| 562 % Check whether we're in the right environment: |
| 563 \def\checkenv#1{% |
| 564 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 565 \ifx\thisenv\temp |
| 566 \else |
| 567 \badenverr |
| 568 \fi |
| 569 } |
| 570 |
| 571 % Environment mismatch, #1 expected: |
| 572 \def\badenverr{% |
| 573 \errhelp = \EMsimple |
| 574 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, |
| 575 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% |
| 576 } |
| 577 \def\inenvironment#1{% |
| 578 \ifx#1\empty |
| 579 out of any environment% |
| 580 \else |
| 581 in environment \expandafter\string#1% |
| 582 \fi |
| 583 } |
| 584 |
| 585 % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. |
| 586 % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv |
| 587 % |
| 588 \parseargdef\end{% |
| 589 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname |
| 590 \else |
| 591 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov0
3 |
| 592 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname |
| 593 \csname E#1\endcsname |
| 594 \endgroup |
| 595 \fi |
| 596 } |
| 597 |
| 598 \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} |
| 599 |
| 600 |
| 601 %% Simple single-character @ commands |
| 602 |
| 603 % @@ prints an @ |
| 604 % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). |
| 605 \def\@{{\tt\char64}} |
| 606 |
| 607 % This is turned off because it was never documented |
| 608 % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. |
| 609 %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' |
| 610 %% but suppressing ligatures. |
| 611 %\def\`{{`}} |
| 612 %\def\'{{'}} |
| 613 |
| 614 % Used to generate quoted braces. |
| 615 \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} |
| 616 \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} |
| 617 \let\{=\mylbrace |
| 618 \let\}=\myrbrace |
| 619 \begingroup |
| 620 % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, |
| 621 % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files. |
| 622 \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other |
| 623 \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 |
| 624 \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other |
| 625 !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% |
| 626 !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% |
| 627 !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% |
| 628 !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% |
| 629 !endgroup |
| 630 |
| 631 % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. |
| 632 \let\comma = , |
| 633 |
| 634 % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent |
| 635 % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. |
| 636 \let\, = \c |
| 637 \let\dotaccent = \. |
| 638 \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} |
| 639 \let\tieaccent = \t |
| 640 \let\ubaraccent = \b |
| 641 \let\udotaccent = \d |
| 642 |
| 643 % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm |
| 644 % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. |
| 645 \def\questiondown{?`} |
| 646 \def\exclamdown{!`} |
| 647 \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} |
| 648 \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} |
| 649 |
| 650 % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. |
| 651 \def\imacro{i} |
| 652 \def\jmacro{j} |
| 653 \def\dotless#1{% |
| 654 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 655 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi |
| 656 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi |
| 657 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% |
| 658 \fi\fi |
| 659 } |
| 660 |
| 661 % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a |
| 662 % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) |
| 663 % |
| 664 \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } |
| 665 |
| 666 % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in |
| 667 % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most |
| 668 % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using |
| 669 % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and |
| 670 % \scriptscriptstyle). |
| 671 % |
| 672 \def\LaTeX{% |
| 673 L\kern-.36em |
| 674 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% |
| 675 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% |
| 676 \kern-.15em |
| 677 \TeX |
| 678 } |
| 679 |
| 680 % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
| 681 % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space |
| 682 % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and |
| 683 % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the |
| 684 % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. |
| 685 {\catcode`@ = 11 |
| 686 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble |
| 687 % if the definition is written into an index file. |
| 688 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M |
| 689 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } |
| 690 } |
| 691 |
| 692 % @: forces normal size whitespace following. |
| 693 \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } |
| 694 |
| 695 % @* forces a line break. |
| 696 \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} |
| 697 |
| 698 % @/ allows a line break. |
| 699 \let\/=\allowbreak |
| 700 |
| 701 % @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
| 702 \def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
| 703 |
| 704 % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. |
| 705 \def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
| 706 |
| 707 % @? is an end-of-sentence query. |
| 708 \def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} |
| 709 |
| 710 % @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. |
| 711 % |
| 712 \def\onword{on} |
| 713 \def\offword{off} |
| 714 % |
| 715 \parseargdef\frenchspacing{% |
| 716 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 717 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing |
| 718 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing |
| 719 \else |
| 720 \errhelp = \EMsimple |
| 721 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}% |
| 722 \fi\fi |
| 723 } |
| 724 |
| 725 % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the |
| 726 % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would |
| 727 % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. |
| 728 \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} |
| 729 |
| 730 % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing |
| 731 % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box |
| 732 % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for |
| 733 % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is |
| 734 % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, |
| 735 % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and |
| 736 % the text is small, which looks bad. |
| 737 % |
| 738 % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can |
| 739 % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it |
| 740 % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an |
| 741 % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The |
| 742 % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit |
| 743 % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). |
| 744 % |
| 745 \newbox\groupbox |
| 746 \def\vfilllimit{0.7} |
| 747 % |
| 748 \envdef\group{% |
| 749 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else |
| 750 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp |
| 751 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% |
| 752 \fi |
| 753 \startsavinginserts |
| 754 % |
| 755 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup |
| 756 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as |
| 757 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an |
| 758 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after |
| 759 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group |
| 760 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo |
| 761 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. |
| 762 \comment |
| 763 } |
| 764 % |
| 765 % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts |
| 766 % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) |
| 767 % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space |
| 768 % above. But it's pretty close. |
| 769 \def\Egroup{% |
| 770 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group |
| 771 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. |
| 772 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. |
| 773 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth |
| 774 \egroup % End the \vtop. |
| 775 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. |
| 776 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox |
| 777 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). |
| 778 \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal |
| 779 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big |
| 780 % group, force a page break. |
| 781 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 |
| 782 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight |
| 783 \page |
| 784 \fi |
| 785 \fi |
| 786 \box\groupbox |
| 787 \prevdepth = \dimen1 |
| 788 \checkinserts |
| 789 } |
| 790 % |
| 791 % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help |
| 792 % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. |
| 793 % |
| 794 \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% |
| 795 group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% |
| 796 where each line of input produces a line of output.} |
| 797 |
| 798 % @need space-in-mils |
| 799 % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. |
| 800 |
| 801 \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in |
| 802 |
| 803 % Old definition--didn't work. |
| 804 %\parseargdef\need{\par % |
| 805 %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
| 806 %% if the depth of the box does not fit. |
| 807 %{\baselineskip=0pt% |
| 808 %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak |
| 809 %\prevdepth=-1000pt |
| 810 %}} |
| 811 |
| 812 \parseargdef\need{% |
| 813 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a |
| 814 % paragraph. |
| 815 \par |
| 816 % |
| 817 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. |
| 818 \dimen0 = #1\mil |
| 819 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox |
| 820 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox |
| 821 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 |
| 822 % |
| 823 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the |
| 824 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. |
| 825 % And a page break here is fine. |
| 826 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% |
| 827 % |
| 828 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the |
| 829 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the |
| 830 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider |
| 831 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the |
| 832 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. |
| 833 % |
| 834 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the |
| 835 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in |
| 836 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which |
| 837 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing |
| 838 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an |
| 839 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real |
| 840 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. |
| 841 \penalty9999 |
| 842 % |
| 843 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. |
| 844 \kern -#1\mil |
| 845 % |
| 846 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. |
| 847 \nobreak |
| 848 \fi |
| 849 } |
| 850 |
| 851 % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). |
| 852 |
| 853 \let\br = \par |
| 854 |
| 855 % @page forces the start of a new page. |
| 856 % |
| 857 \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} |
| 858 |
| 859 % @exdent text.... |
| 860 % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin |
| 861 |
| 862 % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. |
| 863 % That's how much \exdent should take out. |
| 864 \newskip\exdentamount |
| 865 |
| 866 % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. |
| 867 \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} |
| 868 |
| 869 % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. |
| 870 \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
| 871 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} |
| 872 |
| 873 % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current |
| 874 % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion |
| 875 % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. |
| 876 % |
| 877 \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm |
| 878 \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} |
| 879 % |
| 880 \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% |
| 881 \nobreak |
| 882 \kern-\strutdepth |
| 883 \vtop to \strutdepth{% |
| 884 \baselineskip=\strutdepth |
| 885 \vss |
| 886 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to |
| 887 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. |
| 888 \ifx#1l% |
| 889 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% |
| 890 \else |
| 891 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% |
| 892 \fi |
| 893 \null |
| 894 }% |
| 895 }} |
| 896 \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} |
| 897 \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} |
| 898 % |
| 899 % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} |
| 900 % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; |
| 901 % else use TEXT for both). |
| 902 % |
| 903 \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} |
| 904 \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. |
| 905 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
| 906 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
| 907 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts |
| 908 \def\righttext{#2}% |
| 909 \else |
| 910 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text |
| 911 \def\righttext{#1}% |
| 912 \fi |
| 913 % |
| 914 \ifodd\pageno |
| 915 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin |
| 916 \else |
| 917 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% |
| 918 \fi |
| 919 \temp |
| 920 } |
| 921 |
| 922 % @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. |
| 923 % |
| 924 \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} |
| 925 \def\includezzz#1{% |
| 926 \pushthisfilestack |
| 927 \def\thisfile{#1}% |
| 928 {% |
| 929 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. |
| 930 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion |
| 931 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. |
| 932 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% |
| 933 % |
| 934 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes |
| 935 % definitions, etc. |
| 936 \expandafter |
| 937 }\temp |
| 938 \popthisfilestack |
| 939 } |
| 940 \def\filenamecatcodes{% |
| 941 \catcode`\\=\other |
| 942 \catcode`~=\other |
| 943 \catcode`^=\other |
| 944 \catcode`_=\other |
| 945 \catcode`|=\other |
| 946 \catcode`<=\other |
| 947 \catcode`>=\other |
| 948 \catcode`+=\other |
| 949 \catcode`-=\other |
| 950 \catcode`\`=\other |
| 951 \catcode`\'=\other |
| 952 } |
| 953 |
| 954 \def\pushthisfilestack{% |
| 955 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm |
| 956 } |
| 957 \def\pushthisfilestackX{% |
| 958 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm |
| 959 } |
| 960 \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% |
| 961 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% |
| 962 } |
| 963 |
| 964 \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} |
| 965 \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: |
| 966 the stack of filenames is empty.}} |
| 967 |
| 968 \def\thisfile{} |
| 969 |
| 970 % @center line |
| 971 % outputs that line, centered. |
| 972 % |
| 973 \parseargdef\center{% |
| 974 \ifhmode |
| 975 \let\next\centerH |
| 976 \else |
| 977 \let\next\centerV |
| 978 \fi |
| 979 \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% |
| 980 } |
| 981 \def\centerH#1{% |
| 982 {% |
| 983 \hfil\break |
| 984 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip |
| 985 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip |
| 986 \line{#1}% |
| 987 \break |
| 988 }% |
| 989 } |
| 990 \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} |
| 991 |
| 992 % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space |
| 993 |
| 994 \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} |
| 995 |
| 996 % @comment ...line which is ignored... |
| 997 % @c is the same as @comment |
| 998 % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment |
| 999 |
| 1000 \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% |
| 1001 \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% |
| 1002 \commentxxx} |
| 1003 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} |
| 1004 |
| 1005 \let\c=\comment |
| 1006 |
| 1007 % @paragraphindent NCHARS |
| 1008 % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. |
| 1009 % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. |
| 1010 % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. |
| 1011 % |
| 1012 \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords |
| 1013 \def\noneword{none} |
| 1014 % |
| 1015 \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% |
| 1016 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 1017 \ifx\temp\asisword |
| 1018 \else |
| 1019 \ifx\temp\noneword |
| 1020 \defaultparindent = 0pt |
| 1021 \else |
| 1022 \defaultparindent = #1em |
| 1023 \fi |
| 1024 \fi |
| 1025 \parindent = \defaultparindent |
| 1026 } |
| 1027 |
| 1028 % @exampleindent NCHARS |
| 1029 % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. |
| 1030 % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but |
| 1031 % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. |
| 1032 \parseargdef\exampleindent{% |
| 1033 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 1034 \ifx\temp\asisword |
| 1035 \else |
| 1036 \ifx\temp\noneword |
| 1037 \lispnarrowing = 0pt |
| 1038 \else |
| 1039 \lispnarrowing = #1em |
| 1040 \fi |
| 1041 \fi |
| 1042 } |
| 1043 |
| 1044 % @firstparagraphindent WORD |
| 1045 % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph |
| 1046 % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such |
| 1047 % paragraphs. |
| 1048 % |
| 1049 % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling |
| 1050 % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. |
| 1051 % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. |
| 1052 % By default, we suppress indentation. |
| 1053 % |
| 1054 \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} |
| 1055 \def\insertword{insert} |
| 1056 % |
| 1057 \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% |
| 1058 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 1059 \ifx\temp\noneword |
| 1060 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent |
| 1061 \else\ifx\temp\insertword |
| 1062 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax |
| 1063 \else |
| 1064 \errhelp = \EMsimple |
| 1065 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% |
| 1066 \fi\fi |
| 1067 } |
| 1068 |
| 1069 % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to |
| 1070 % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. |
| 1071 % |
| 1072 % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next |
| 1073 % paragraph. |
| 1074 % |
| 1075 \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% |
| 1076 \gdef\indent{% |
| 1077 \restorefirstparagraphindent |
| 1078 \indent |
| 1079 }% |
| 1080 \gdef\noindent{% |
| 1081 \restorefirstparagraphindent |
| 1082 \noindent |
| 1083 }% |
| 1084 \global\everypar = {% |
| 1085 \kern -\parindent |
| 1086 \restorefirstparagraphindent |
| 1087 }% |
| 1088 } |
| 1089 |
| 1090 \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% |
| 1091 \global \let \indent = \ptexindent |
| 1092 \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent |
| 1093 \global \everypar = {}% |
| 1094 } |
| 1095 |
| 1096 |
| 1097 % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
| 1098 % |
| 1099 \def\asis#1{#1} |
| 1100 |
| 1101 % @math outputs its argument in math mode. |
| 1102 % |
| 1103 % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean |
| 1104 % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make |
| 1105 % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, |
| 1106 % which is what @var uses. |
| 1107 { |
| 1108 \catcode`\_ = \active |
| 1109 \gdef\mathunderscore{% |
| 1110 \catcode`\_=\active |
| 1111 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% |
| 1112 } |
| 1113 } |
| 1114 % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. |
| 1115 % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but |
| 1116 % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not |
| 1117 % otherwise define @\. |
| 1118 % |
| 1119 % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. |
| 1120 \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} |
| 1121 % |
| 1122 \def\math{% |
| 1123 \tex |
| 1124 \mathunderscore |
| 1125 \let\\ = \mathbackslash |
| 1126 \mathactive |
| 1127 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode |
| 1128 \let\"=\ddot |
| 1129 \let\'=\acute |
| 1130 \let\==\bar |
| 1131 \let\^=\hat |
| 1132 \let\`=\grave |
| 1133 \let\u=\breve |
| 1134 \let\v=\check |
| 1135 \let\~=\tilde |
| 1136 \let\dotaccent=\dot |
| 1137 $\finishmath |
| 1138 } |
| 1139 \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. |
| 1140 |
| 1141 % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. |
| 1142 % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument |
| 1143 % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). |
| 1144 % |
| 1145 { |
| 1146 \catcode`^ = \active |
| 1147 \catcode`< = \active |
| 1148 \catcode`> = \active |
| 1149 \catcode`+ = \active |
| 1150 \catcode`' = \active |
| 1151 \gdef\mathactive{% |
| 1152 \let^ = \ptexhat |
| 1153 \let< = \ptexless |
| 1154 \let> = \ptexgtr |
| 1155 \let+ = \ptexplus |
| 1156 \let' = \ptexquoteright |
| 1157 } |
| 1158 } |
| 1159 |
| 1160 % Some math mode symbols. |
| 1161 \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} |
| 1162 \def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi} |
| 1163 \def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi} |
| 1164 \def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi} |
| 1165 |
| 1166 % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. |
| 1167 % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm |
| 1168 % typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, |
| 1169 % in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do |
| 1170 % whichever is larger. |
| 1171 % |
| 1172 \def\dots{% |
| 1173 \leavevmode |
| 1174 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods |
| 1175 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em |
| 1176 \dimen0 = \wd0 |
| 1177 \else |
| 1178 \dimen0 = 1.5em |
| 1179 \fi |
| 1180 \hbox to \dimen0{% |
| 1181 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil |
| 1182 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil |
| 1183 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil |
| 1184 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil |
| 1185 }% |
| 1186 } |
| 1187 |
| 1188 % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. |
| 1189 % |
| 1190 \def\enddots{% |
| 1191 \dots |
| 1192 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor |
| 1193 } |
| 1194 |
| 1195 % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up |
| 1196 % Texinfo's parsing. |
| 1197 % |
| 1198 \let\comma = , |
| 1199 |
| 1200 % @refill is a no-op. |
| 1201 \let\refill=\relax |
| 1202 |
| 1203 % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to |
| 1204 % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. |
| 1205 % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). |
| 1206 % |
| 1207 \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. |
| 1208 \let\novalidate = \linksfalse |
| 1209 |
| 1210 % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. |
| 1211 % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. |
| 1212 % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. |
| 1213 \def\setfilename{% |
| 1214 \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
| 1215 \iflinks |
| 1216 \tryauxfile |
| 1217 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. |
| 1218 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux |
| 1219 \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. |
| 1220 \openindices |
| 1221 \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
| 1222 % |
| 1223 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. |
| 1224 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. |
| 1225 \openin 1 texinfo.cnf |
| 1226 \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi |
| 1227 \closein 1 |
| 1228 % |
| 1229 \comment % Ignore the actual filename. |
| 1230 } |
| 1231 |
| 1232 % Called from \setfilename. |
| 1233 % |
| 1234 \def\openindices{% |
| 1235 \newindex{cp}% |
| 1236 \newcodeindex{fn}% |
| 1237 \newcodeindex{vr}% |
| 1238 \newcodeindex{tp}% |
| 1239 \newcodeindex{ky}% |
| 1240 \newcodeindex{pg}% |
| 1241 } |
| 1242 |
| 1243 % @bye. |
| 1244 \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} |
| 1245 |
| 1246 |
| 1247 \message{pdf,} |
| 1248 % adobe `portable' document format |
| 1249 \newcount\tempnum |
| 1250 \newcount\lnkcount |
| 1251 \newtoks\filename |
| 1252 \newcount\filenamelength |
| 1253 \newcount\pgn |
| 1254 \newtoks\toksA |
| 1255 \newtoks\toksB |
| 1256 \newtoks\toksC |
| 1257 \newtoks\toksD |
| 1258 \newbox\boxA |
| 1259 \newcount\countA |
| 1260 \newif\ifpdf |
| 1261 \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest |
| 1262 |
| 1263 % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 |
| 1264 % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, |
| 1265 % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. |
| 1266 \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined |
| 1267 \else |
| 1268 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax |
| 1269 \else |
| 1270 \ifcase\pdfoutput |
| 1271 \else |
| 1272 \pdftrue |
| 1273 \fi |
| 1274 \fi |
| 1275 \fi |
| 1276 |
| 1277 % PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, |
| 1278 % for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to |
| 1279 % double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be |
| 1280 % interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. |
| 1281 % http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html |
| 1282 % (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX |
| 1283 % user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so |
| 1284 % that's what we do). |
| 1285 |
| 1286 % double active backslashes. |
| 1287 % |
| 1288 {\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active |
| 1289 @gdef@activebackslashdouble{% |
| 1290 @catcode`@\=@active |
| 1291 @let\=@doublebackslash} |
| 1292 } |
| 1293 |
| 1294 % To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are |
| 1295 % not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as |
| 1296 % us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor |
| 1297 % changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission |
| 1298 % from the author, Heiko Oberdiek. |
| 1299 % |
| 1300 % #1 is the tokens to replace. |
| 1301 % #2 is the replacement. |
| 1302 % #3 is the control sequence with the string. |
| 1303 % |
| 1304 \def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{% |
| 1305 \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{% |
| 1306 ##1% |
| 1307 \ifx\\##2\\% |
| 1308 \else |
| 1309 #2% |
| 1310 \HyReturnAfterFi{% |
| 1311 \HyPsdReplace##2\END |
| 1312 }% |
| 1313 \fi |
| 1314 }% |
| 1315 \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}% |
| 1316 } |
| 1317 \long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1} |
| 1318 |
| 1319 % #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements. |
| 1320 \def\backslashparens#1{% |
| 1321 \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply |
| 1322 % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest. |
| 1323 \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}% |
| 1324 \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}% |
| 1325 } |
| 1326 |
| 1327 \newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images |
| 1328 with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot |
| 1329 be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI |
| 1330 output) for that.)} |
| 1331 |
| 1332 \ifpdf |
| 1333 % |
| 1334 % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex. |
| 1335 \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35} |
| 1336 \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1} |
| 1337 % |
| 1338 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}} |
| 1339 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, |
| 1340 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. |
| 1341 \def\setcolor#1{% |
| 1342 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% |
| 1343 \domark |
| 1344 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% |
| 1345 } |
| 1346 % |
| 1347 \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack} |
| 1348 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} |
| 1349 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} |
| 1350 \def\lastcolordefs{} |
| 1351 % |
| 1352 \def\makefootline{% |
| 1353 \baselineskip24pt |
| 1354 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% |
| 1355 } |
| 1356 % |
| 1357 \def\makeheadline{% |
| 1358 \vbox to 0pt{% |
| 1359 \vskip-22.5pt |
| 1360 \line{% |
| 1361 \vbox to8.5pt{}% |
| 1362 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. |
| 1363 \getcolormarks |
| 1364 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. |
| 1365 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% |
| 1366 }% |
| 1367 \vss |
| 1368 }% |
| 1369 \nointerlineskip |
| 1370 } |
| 1371 % |
| 1372 % |
| 1373 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} |
| 1374 % |
| 1375 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). |
| 1376 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% |
| 1377 \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
| 1378 \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% |
| 1379 % |
| 1380 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among |
| 1381 % others). Let's try in that order. |
| 1382 \let\pdfimgext=\empty |
| 1383 \begingroup |
| 1384 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 |
| 1385 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 |
| 1386 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 |
| 1387 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 |
| 1388 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 |
| 1389 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 |
| 1390 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp |
| 1391 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% |
| 1392 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% |
| 1393 \fi |
| 1394 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% |
| 1395 \fi |
| 1396 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% |
| 1397 \fi |
| 1398 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% |
| 1399 \fi |
| 1400 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% |
| 1401 \fi |
| 1402 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% |
| 1403 \fi |
| 1404 \closein 1 |
| 1405 \endgroup |
| 1406 % |
| 1407 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is |
| 1408 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) |
| 1409 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
| 1410 \immediate\pdfimage |
| 1411 \else |
| 1412 \immediate\pdfximage |
| 1413 \fi |
| 1414 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi |
| 1415 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi |
| 1416 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 |
| 1417 #1.\pdfimgext |
| 1418 \else |
| 1419 {#1.\pdfimgext}% |
| 1420 \fi |
| 1421 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else |
| 1422 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage |
| 1423 \fi} |
| 1424 % |
| 1425 \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% |
| 1426 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters |
| 1427 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. |
| 1428 \indexnofonts |
| 1429 \turnoffactive |
| 1430 \activebackslashdouble |
| 1431 \makevalueexpandable |
| 1432 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% |
| 1433 \backslashparens\pdfdestname |
| 1434 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% |
| 1435 }} |
| 1436 % |
| 1437 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. |
| 1438 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} |
| 1439 % |
| 1440 % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as |
| 1441 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. |
| 1442 \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed} |
| 1443 \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed} |
| 1444 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} |
| 1445 % |
| 1446 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines |
| 1447 % come from Petr Olsak |
| 1448 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% |
| 1449 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} |
| 1450 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax |
| 1451 \advance\tempnum by 1 |
| 1452 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} |
| 1453 % |
| 1454 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the |
| 1455 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number |
| 1456 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, |
| 1457 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. |
| 1458 % #4 is the page number |
| 1459 % |
| 1460 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% |
| 1461 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the |
| 1462 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section |
| 1463 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't |
| 1464 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. |
| 1465 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% |
| 1466 \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty |
| 1467 \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}% |
| 1468 \else |
| 1469 % Doubled backslashes in the name. |
| 1470 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% |
| 1471 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}% |
| 1472 \fi |
| 1473 % |
| 1474 % Also double the backslashes in the display string. |
| 1475 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% |
| 1476 \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}% |
| 1477 % |
| 1478 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% |
| 1479 } |
| 1480 % |
| 1481 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% |
| 1482 \begingroup |
| 1483 % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks |
| 1484 \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace |
| 1485 \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace |
| 1486 % |
| 1487 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. |
| 1488 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% |
| 1489 \def\thischapnum{##2}% |
| 1490 \def\thissecnum{0}% |
| 1491 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% |
| 1492 }% |
| 1493 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
| 1494 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% |
| 1495 \def\thissecnum{##2}% |
| 1496 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% |
| 1497 }% |
| 1498 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
| 1499 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% |
| 1500 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% |
| 1501 }% |
| 1502 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
| 1503 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% |
| 1504 }% |
| 1505 \def\thischapnum{0}% |
| 1506 \def\thissecnum{0}% |
| 1507 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% |
| 1508 % |
| 1509 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et |
| 1510 % al. a second time, below. |
| 1511 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% |
| 1512 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% |
| 1513 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% |
| 1514 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% |
| 1515 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% |
| 1516 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% |
| 1517 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% |
| 1518 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% |
| 1519 \readdatafile{toc}% |
| 1520 % |
| 1521 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. |
| 1522 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of |
| 1523 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. |
| 1524 % |
| 1525 % We use the node names as the destinations. |
| 1526 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% |
| 1527 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% |
| 1528 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
| 1529 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% |
| 1530 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% |
| 1531 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% |
| 1532 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero |
| 1533 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% |
| 1534 % |
| 1535 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of |
| 1536 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, |
| 1537 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from |
| 1538 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from |
| 1539 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. |
| 1540 % |
| 1541 % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to |
| 1542 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right |
| 1543 % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. |
| 1544 \indexnofonts |
| 1545 \setupdatafile |
| 1546 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash |
| 1547 \input \tocreadfilename |
| 1548 \endgroup |
| 1549 } |
| 1550 % |
| 1551 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% |
| 1552 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax |
| 1553 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces |
| 1554 \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% |
| 1555 \advance\filenamelength by 1 |
| 1556 \fi |
| 1557 \fi |
| 1558 \nextsp} |
| 1559 \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} |
| 1560 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 |
| 1561 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink |
| 1562 \else |
| 1563 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink |
| 1564 \fi |
| 1565 % make a live url in pdf output. |
| 1566 \def\pdfurl#1{% |
| 1567 \begingroup |
| 1568 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not |
| 1569 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context |
| 1570 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one |
| 1571 % people have actually reported a problem with. |
| 1572 % |
| 1573 \normalturnoffactive |
| 1574 \def\@{@}% |
| 1575 \let\/=\empty |
| 1576 \makevalueexpandable |
| 1577 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% |
| 1578 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
| 1579 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% |
| 1580 \endgroup} |
| 1581 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} |
| 1582 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} |
| 1583 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} |
| 1584 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} |
| 1585 \def\maketoks{% |
| 1586 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax |
| 1587 \ifx\first0\adn0 |
| 1588 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 |
| 1589 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 |
| 1590 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 |
| 1591 \else |
| 1592 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi |
| 1593 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else |
| 1594 \let\next=\maketoks |
| 1595 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} |
| 1596 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi |
| 1597 \fi |
| 1598 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
| 1599 \next} |
| 1600 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% |
| 1601 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} |
| 1602 \def\pdflink#1{% |
| 1603 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} |
| 1604 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} |
| 1605 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} |
| 1606 \else |
| 1607 % non-pdf mode |
| 1608 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble |
| 1609 \let\pdfurl = \gobble |
| 1610 \let\endlink = \relax |
| 1611 \let\setcolor = \gobble |
| 1612 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble |
| 1613 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax |
| 1614 \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput |
| 1615 |
| 1616 |
| 1617 \message{fonts,} |
| 1618 |
| 1619 % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. |
| 1620 % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in |
| 1621 % italics, not bold italics. |
| 1622 % |
| 1623 \def\setfontstyle#1{% |
| 1624 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. |
| 1625 \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font |
| 1626 } |
| 1627 |
| 1628 % Select #1 fonts with the current style. |
| 1629 % |
| 1630 \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} |
| 1631 |
| 1632 \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} |
| 1633 \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} |
| 1634 \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} |
| 1635 \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} |
| 1636 \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} |
| 1637 |
| 1638 % Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since |
| 1639 % in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh. |
| 1640 \def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}} |
| 1641 |
| 1642 % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. |
| 1643 % So we set up a \sf. |
| 1644 \newfam\sffam |
| 1645 \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} |
| 1646 \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
| 1647 |
| 1648 % We don't need math for this font style. |
| 1649 \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} |
| 1650 |
| 1651 |
| 1652 % Default leading. |
| 1653 \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt |
| 1654 |
| 1655 % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size |
| 1656 % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers |
| 1657 % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. |
| 1658 % |
| 1659 \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} |
| 1660 \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} |
| 1661 \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} |
| 1662 % |
| 1663 % can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. |
| 1664 \def\baselinefactor{1} |
| 1665 % |
| 1666 \def\setleading#1{% |
| 1667 \dimen0 = #1\relax |
| 1668 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 |
| 1669 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip |
| 1670 \normalbaselines |
| 1671 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% |
| 1672 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip |
| 1673 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip |
| 1674 }% |
| 1675 } |
| 1676 |
| 1677 % PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. |
| 1678 % |
| 1679 % do nothing with this by default. |
| 1680 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble |
| 1681 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble |
| 1682 \expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble |
| 1683 |
| 1684 % if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. |
| 1685 % (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run |
| 1686 % older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) |
| 1687 \ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else |
| 1688 \begingroup |
| 1689 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. |
| 1690 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap |
| 1691 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
| 1692 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
| 1693 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) |
| 1694 %%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) |
| 1695 %%Version: 1.000 |
| 1696 %%EndComments |
| 1697 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin |
| 1698 12 dict begin |
| 1699 begincmap |
| 1700 /CIDSystemInfo |
| 1701 << /Registry (TeX) |
| 1702 /Ordering (OT1) |
| 1703 /Supplement 0 |
| 1704 >> def |
| 1705 /CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def |
| 1706 /CMapType 2 def |
| 1707 1 begincodespacerange |
| 1708 <00> <7F> |
| 1709 endcodespacerange |
| 1710 8 beginbfrange |
| 1711 <00> <01> <0393> |
| 1712 <09> <0A> <03A8> |
| 1713 <23> <26> <0023> |
| 1714 <28> <3B> <0028> |
| 1715 <3F> <5B> <003F> |
| 1716 <5D> <5E> <005D> |
| 1717 <61> <7A> <0061> |
| 1718 <7B> <7C> <2013> |
| 1719 endbfrange |
| 1720 40 beginbfchar |
| 1721 <02> <0398> |
| 1722 <03> <039B> |
| 1723 <04> <039E> |
| 1724 <05> <03A0> |
| 1725 <06> <03A3> |
| 1726 <07> <03D2> |
| 1727 <08> <03A6> |
| 1728 <0B> <00660066> |
| 1729 <0C> <00660069> |
| 1730 <0D> <0066006C> |
| 1731 <0E> <006600660069> |
| 1732 <0F> <00660066006C> |
| 1733 <10> <0131> |
| 1734 <11> <0237> |
| 1735 <12> <0060> |
| 1736 <13> <00B4> |
| 1737 <14> <02C7> |
| 1738 <15> <02D8> |
| 1739 <16> <00AF> |
| 1740 <17> <02DA> |
| 1741 <18> <00B8> |
| 1742 <19> <00DF> |
| 1743 <1A> <00E6> |
| 1744 <1B> <0153> |
| 1745 <1C> <00F8> |
| 1746 <1D> <00C6> |
| 1747 <1E> <0152> |
| 1748 <1F> <00D8> |
| 1749 <21> <0021> |
| 1750 <22> <201D> |
| 1751 <27> <2019> |
| 1752 <3C> <00A1> |
| 1753 <3D> <003D> |
| 1754 <3E> <00BF> |
| 1755 <5C> <201C> |
| 1756 <5F> <02D9> |
| 1757 <60> <2018> |
| 1758 <7D> <02DD> |
| 1759 <7E> <007E> |
| 1760 <7F> <00A8> |
| 1761 endbfchar |
| 1762 endcmap |
| 1763 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop |
| 1764 end |
| 1765 end |
| 1766 %%EndResource |
| 1767 %%EOF |
| 1768 }\endgroup |
| 1769 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% |
| 1770 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% |
| 1771 }% |
| 1772 % |
| 1773 % \cmapOT1IT |
| 1774 \begingroup |
| 1775 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. |
| 1776 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap |
| 1777 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
| 1778 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
| 1779 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) |
| 1780 %%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) |
| 1781 %%Version: 1.000 |
| 1782 %%EndComments |
| 1783 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin |
| 1784 12 dict begin |
| 1785 begincmap |
| 1786 /CIDSystemInfo |
| 1787 << /Registry (TeX) |
| 1788 /Ordering (OT1IT) |
| 1789 /Supplement 0 |
| 1790 >> def |
| 1791 /CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def |
| 1792 /CMapType 2 def |
| 1793 1 begincodespacerange |
| 1794 <00> <7F> |
| 1795 endcodespacerange |
| 1796 8 beginbfrange |
| 1797 <00> <01> <0393> |
| 1798 <09> <0A> <03A8> |
| 1799 <25> <26> <0025> |
| 1800 <28> <3B> <0028> |
| 1801 <3F> <5B> <003F> |
| 1802 <5D> <5E> <005D> |
| 1803 <61> <7A> <0061> |
| 1804 <7B> <7C> <2013> |
| 1805 endbfrange |
| 1806 42 beginbfchar |
| 1807 <02> <0398> |
| 1808 <03> <039B> |
| 1809 <04> <039E> |
| 1810 <05> <03A0> |
| 1811 <06> <03A3> |
| 1812 <07> <03D2> |
| 1813 <08> <03A6> |
| 1814 <0B> <00660066> |
| 1815 <0C> <00660069> |
| 1816 <0D> <0066006C> |
| 1817 <0E> <006600660069> |
| 1818 <0F> <00660066006C> |
| 1819 <10> <0131> |
| 1820 <11> <0237> |
| 1821 <12> <0060> |
| 1822 <13> <00B4> |
| 1823 <14> <02C7> |
| 1824 <15> <02D8> |
| 1825 <16> <00AF> |
| 1826 <17> <02DA> |
| 1827 <18> <00B8> |
| 1828 <19> <00DF> |
| 1829 <1A> <00E6> |
| 1830 <1B> <0153> |
| 1831 <1C> <00F8> |
| 1832 <1D> <00C6> |
| 1833 <1E> <0152> |
| 1834 <1F> <00D8> |
| 1835 <21> <0021> |
| 1836 <22> <201D> |
| 1837 <23> <0023> |
| 1838 <24> <00A3> |
| 1839 <27> <2019> |
| 1840 <3C> <00A1> |
| 1841 <3D> <003D> |
| 1842 <3E> <00BF> |
| 1843 <5C> <201C> |
| 1844 <5F> <02D9> |
| 1845 <60> <2018> |
| 1846 <7D> <02DD> |
| 1847 <7E> <007E> |
| 1848 <7F> <00A8> |
| 1849 endbfchar |
| 1850 endcmap |
| 1851 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop |
| 1852 end |
| 1853 end |
| 1854 %%EndResource |
| 1855 %%EOF |
| 1856 }\endgroup |
| 1857 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% |
| 1858 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% |
| 1859 }% |
| 1860 % |
| 1861 % \cmapOT1TT |
| 1862 \begingroup |
| 1863 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. |
| 1864 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap |
| 1865 %%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
| 1866 %%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) |
| 1867 %%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) |
| 1868 %%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) |
| 1869 %%Version: 1.000 |
| 1870 %%EndComments |
| 1871 /CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin |
| 1872 12 dict begin |
| 1873 begincmap |
| 1874 /CIDSystemInfo |
| 1875 << /Registry (TeX) |
| 1876 /Ordering (OT1TT) |
| 1877 /Supplement 0 |
| 1878 >> def |
| 1879 /CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def |
| 1880 /CMapType 2 def |
| 1881 1 begincodespacerange |
| 1882 <00> <7F> |
| 1883 endcodespacerange |
| 1884 5 beginbfrange |
| 1885 <00> <01> <0393> |
| 1886 <09> <0A> <03A8> |
| 1887 <21> <26> <0021> |
| 1888 <28> <5F> <0028> |
| 1889 <61> <7E> <0061> |
| 1890 endbfrange |
| 1891 32 beginbfchar |
| 1892 <02> <0398> |
| 1893 <03> <039B> |
| 1894 <04> <039E> |
| 1895 <05> <03A0> |
| 1896 <06> <03A3> |
| 1897 <07> <03D2> |
| 1898 <08> <03A6> |
| 1899 <0B> <2191> |
| 1900 <0C> <2193> |
| 1901 <0D> <0027> |
| 1902 <0E> <00A1> |
| 1903 <0F> <00BF> |
| 1904 <10> <0131> |
| 1905 <11> <0237> |
| 1906 <12> <0060> |
| 1907 <13> <00B4> |
| 1908 <14> <02C7> |
| 1909 <15> <02D8> |
| 1910 <16> <00AF> |
| 1911 <17> <02DA> |
| 1912 <18> <00B8> |
| 1913 <19> <00DF> |
| 1914 <1A> <00E6> |
| 1915 <1B> <0153> |
| 1916 <1C> <00F8> |
| 1917 <1D> <00C6> |
| 1918 <1E> <0152> |
| 1919 <1F> <00D8> |
| 1920 <20> <2423> |
| 1921 <27> <2019> |
| 1922 <60> <2018> |
| 1923 <7F> <00A8> |
| 1924 endbfchar |
| 1925 endcmap |
| 1926 CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop |
| 1927 end |
| 1928 end |
| 1929 %%EndResource |
| 1930 %%EOF |
| 1931 }\endgroup |
| 1932 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% |
| 1933 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% |
| 1934 }% |
| 1935 \fi\fi |
| 1936 |
| 1937 |
| 1938 % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
| 1939 % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). |
| 1940 % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap |
| 1941 % encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass |
| 1942 % empty to omit). |
| 1943 \def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% |
| 1944 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 |
| 1945 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% |
| 1946 } |
| 1947 % This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. |
| 1948 \let\cmap\gobble |
| 1949 % emacs-page end of cmaps |
| 1950 |
| 1951 % Use cm as the default font prefix. |
| 1952 % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix |
| 1953 % before you read in texinfo.tex. |
| 1954 \ifx\fontprefix\undefined |
| 1955 \def\fontprefix{cm} |
| 1956 \fi |
| 1957 % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. |
| 1958 \def\rmshape{r} |
| 1959 \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold |
| 1960 \def\bfshape{b} |
| 1961 \def\bxshape{bx} |
| 1962 \def\ttshape{tt} |
| 1963 \def\ttbshape{tt} |
| 1964 \def\ttslshape{sltt} |
| 1965 \def\itshape{ti} |
| 1966 \def\itbshape{bxti} |
| 1967 \def\slshape{sl} |
| 1968 \def\slbshape{bxsl} |
| 1969 \def\sfshape{ss} |
| 1970 \def\sfbshape{ss} |
| 1971 \def\scshape{csc} |
| 1972 \def\scbshape{csc} |
| 1973 |
| 1974 % Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in |
| 1975 % Texinfo. |
| 1976 % |
| 1977 \def\definetextfontsizexi{% |
| 1978 % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). |
| 1979 \def\textnominalsize{11pt} |
| 1980 \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} |
| 1981 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 1982 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} |
| 1983 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 1984 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} |
| 1985 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 1986 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 1987 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 1988 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} |
| 1989 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
| 1990 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
| 1991 \def\textecsize{1095} |
| 1992 |
| 1993 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
| 1994 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 1995 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
| 1996 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
| 1997 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} |
| 1998 |
| 1999 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). |
| 2000 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
| 2001 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2002 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2003 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
| 2004 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} |
| 2005 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2006 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2007 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
| 2008 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} |
| 2009 \font\smalli=cmmi9 |
| 2010 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
| 2011 \def\smallecsize{0900} |
| 2012 |
| 2013 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
| 2014 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
| 2015 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2016 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2017 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} |
| 2018 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} |
| 2019 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2020 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2021 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} |
| 2022 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} |
| 2023 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 |
| 2024 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 |
| 2025 \def\smallerecsize{0800} |
| 2026 |
| 2027 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
| 2028 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} |
| 2029 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
| 2030 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} |
| 2031 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
| 2032 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} |
| 2033 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} |
| 2034 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 2035 \let\titlebf=\titlerm |
| 2036 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
| 2037 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
| 2038 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
| 2039 \def\titleecsize{2074} |
| 2040 |
| 2041 % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). |
| 2042 \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} |
| 2043 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
| 2044 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} |
| 2045 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
| 2046 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} |
| 2047 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} |
| 2048 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2049 \let\chapbf=\chaprm |
| 2050 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
| 2051 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 |
| 2052 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 |
| 2053 \def\chapecsize{1728} |
| 2054 |
| 2055 % Section fonts (14.4pt). |
| 2056 \def\secnominalsize{14pt} |
| 2057 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 2058 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} |
| 2059 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
| 2060 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
| 2061 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} |
| 2062 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 2063 \let\secbf\secrm |
| 2064 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
| 2065 \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
| 2066 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
| 2067 \def\sececsize{1440} |
| 2068 |
| 2069 % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). |
| 2070 \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} |
| 2071 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} |
| 2072 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} |
| 2073 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} |
| 2074 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} |
| 2075 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} |
| 2076 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} |
| 2077 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
| 2078 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} |
| 2079 \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
| 2080 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 |
| 2081 \def\ssececsize{1200} |
| 2082 |
| 2083 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). |
| 2084 \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} |
| 2085 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2086 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2087 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2088 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} |
| 2089 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2090 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2091 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2092 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2093 \font\reducedi=cmmi10 |
| 2094 \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 |
| 2095 \def\reducedecsize{1000} |
| 2096 |
| 2097 % reset the current fonts |
| 2098 \textfonts |
| 2099 \rm |
| 2100 } % end of 11pt text font size definitions |
| 2101 |
| 2102 |
| 2103 % Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with |
| 2104 % section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU |
| 2105 % Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the |
| 2106 % future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. |
| 2107 % |
| 2108 \def\definetextfontsizex{% |
| 2109 % Text fonts (10pt). |
| 2110 \def\textnominalsize{10pt} |
| 2111 \edef\mainmagstep{1000} |
| 2112 \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 2113 \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} |
| 2114 \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 2115 \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} |
| 2116 \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 2117 \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 2118 \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} |
| 2119 \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} |
| 2120 \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
| 2121 \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
| 2122 \def\textecsize{1000} |
| 2123 |
| 2124 % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
| 2125 \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} |
| 2126 \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} |
| 2127 \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} |
| 2128 \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} |
| 2129 |
| 2130 % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). |
| 2131 \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
| 2132 \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2133 \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2134 \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
| 2135 \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} |
| 2136 \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2137 \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2138 \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
| 2139 \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} |
| 2140 \font\smalli=cmmi9 |
| 2141 \font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
| 2142 \def\smallecsize{0900} |
| 2143 |
| 2144 % Fonts for small examples (8pt). |
| 2145 \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
| 2146 \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2147 \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2148 \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} |
| 2149 \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} |
| 2150 \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2151 \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2152 \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} |
| 2153 \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} |
| 2154 \font\smalleri=cmmi8 |
| 2155 \font\smallersy=cmsy8 |
| 2156 \def\smallerecsize{0800} |
| 2157 |
| 2158 % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): |
| 2159 \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} |
| 2160 \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} |
| 2161 \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} |
| 2162 \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
| 2163 \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} |
| 2164 \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} |
| 2165 \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 2166 \let\titlebf=\titlerm |
| 2167 \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} |
| 2168 \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
| 2169 \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
| 2170 \def\titleecsize{2074} |
| 2171 |
| 2172 % Chapter fonts (14.4pt). |
| 2173 \def\chapnominalsize{14pt} |
| 2174 \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 2175 \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} |
| 2176 \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
| 2177 \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
| 2178 \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} |
| 2179 \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 2180 \let\chapbf\chaprm |
| 2181 \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} |
| 2182 \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
| 2183 \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
| 2184 \def\chapecsize{1440} |
| 2185 |
| 2186 % Section fonts (12pt). |
| 2187 \def\secnominalsize{12pt} |
| 2188 \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2189 \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} |
| 2190 \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 2191 \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2192 \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} |
| 2193 \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2194 \let\secbf\secrm |
| 2195 \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} |
| 2196 \font\seci=cmmi12 |
| 2197 \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
| 2198 \def\sececsize{1200} |
| 2199 |
| 2200 % Subsection fonts (10pt). |
| 2201 \def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} |
| 2202 \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2203 \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} |
| 2204 \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2205 \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2206 \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2207 \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2208 \let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
| 2209 \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2210 \font\sseci=cmmi10 |
| 2211 \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 |
| 2212 \def\ssececsize{1000} |
| 2213 |
| 2214 % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt). |
| 2215 \def\reducednominalsize{9pt} |
| 2216 \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2217 \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2218 \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
| 2219 \setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} |
| 2220 \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2221 \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2222 \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} |
| 2223 \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} |
| 2224 \font\reducedi=cmmi9 |
| 2225 \font\reducedsy=cmsy9 |
| 2226 \def\reducedecsize{0900} |
| 2227 |
| 2228 % reduce space between paragraphs |
| 2229 \divide\parskip by 2 |
| 2230 |
| 2231 % reset the current fonts |
| 2232 \textfonts |
| 2233 \rm |
| 2234 } % end of 10pt text font size definitions |
| 2235 |
| 2236 |
| 2237 % We provide the user-level command |
| 2238 % @fonttextsize 10 |
| 2239 % (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. |
| 2240 % |
| 2241 \def\xword{10} |
| 2242 \def\xiword{11} |
| 2243 % |
| 2244 \parseargdef\fonttextsize{% |
| 2245 \def\textsizearg{#1}% |
| 2246 \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% |
| 2247 % |
| 2248 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since |
| 2249 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. |
| 2250 % |
| 2251 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 |
| 2252 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex |
| 2253 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi |
| 2254 \else |
| 2255 \errhelp=\EMsimple |
| 2256 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} |
| 2257 \fi\fi |
| 2258 \endgroup |
| 2259 } |
| 2260 |
| 2261 |
| 2262 % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
| 2263 % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since |
| 2264 % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except |
| 2265 % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and |
| 2266 % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). |
| 2267 % |
| 2268 \def\resetmathfonts{% |
| 2269 \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy |
| 2270 \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf |
| 2271 \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf |
| 2272 } |
| 2273 |
| 2274 % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead |
| 2275 % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the |
| 2276 % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire |
| 2277 % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. |
| 2278 % |
| 2279 % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) |
| 2280 % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in |
| 2281 % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. |
| 2282 % |
| 2283 % This all needs generalizing, badly. |
| 2284 % |
| 2285 \def\textfonts{% |
| 2286 \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl |
| 2287 \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc |
| 2288 \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy |
| 2289 \let\tenttsl=\textttsl |
| 2290 \def\curfontsize{text}% |
| 2291 \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
| 2292 \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} |
| 2293 \def\titlefonts{% |
| 2294 \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl |
| 2295 \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc |
| 2296 \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy |
| 2297 \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl |
| 2298 \def\curfontsize{title}% |
| 2299 \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% |
| 2300 \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} |
| 2301 \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}} |
| 2302 \def\chapfonts{% |
| 2303 \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl |
| 2304 \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc |
| 2305 \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy |
| 2306 \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl |
| 2307 \def\curfontsize{chap}% |
| 2308 \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% |
| 2309 \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} |
| 2310 \def\secfonts{% |
| 2311 \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl |
| 2312 \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc |
| 2313 \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy |
| 2314 \let\tenttsl=\secttsl |
| 2315 \def\curfontsize{sec}% |
| 2316 \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% |
| 2317 \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} |
| 2318 \def\subsecfonts{% |
| 2319 \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl |
| 2320 \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc |
| 2321 \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy |
| 2322 \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl |
| 2323 \def\curfontsize{ssec}% |
| 2324 \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% |
| 2325 \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
| 2326 \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts |
| 2327 \def\reducedfonts{% |
| 2328 \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl |
| 2329 \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc |
| 2330 \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy |
| 2331 \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl |
| 2332 \def\curfontsize{reduced}% |
| 2333 \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
| 2334 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} |
| 2335 \def\smallfonts{% |
| 2336 \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl |
| 2337 \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc |
| 2338 \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy |
| 2339 \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl |
| 2340 \def\curfontsize{small}% |
| 2341 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
| 2342 \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} |
| 2343 \def\smallerfonts{% |
| 2344 \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl |
| 2345 \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc |
| 2346 \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy |
| 2347 \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl |
| 2348 \def\curfontsize{smaller}% |
| 2349 \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
| 2350 \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} |
| 2351 |
| 2352 % Fonts for short table of contents. |
| 2353 \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2354 \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 |
| 2355 \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2356 \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} |
| 2357 |
| 2358 % Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. |
| 2359 \def\angleleft{$\langle$} |
| 2360 \def\angleright{$\rangle$} |
| 2361 |
| 2362 % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. |
| 2363 \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts |
| 2364 |
| 2365 % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample |
| 2366 % can fit this many characters: |
| 2367 % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 |
| 2368 % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: |
| 2369 % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 |
| 2370 % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth |
| 2371 % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. |
| 2372 % |
| 2373 % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): |
| 2374 % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 |
| 2375 % --karl, 24jan03. |
| 2376 |
| 2377 % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. |
| 2378 % |
| 2379 \definetextfontsizexi |
| 2380 |
| 2381 |
| 2382 \message{markup,} |
| 2383 |
| 2384 % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the |
| 2385 % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and |
| 2386 % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have |
| 2387 % this property, we can check that font parameter. |
| 2388 % |
| 2389 \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } |
| 2390 |
| 2391 % Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will |
| 2392 % define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. |
| 2393 % \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost |
| 2394 % style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles |
| 2395 % currently in effect. |
| 2396 \newif\ifmarkupvar |
| 2397 \newif\ifmarkupsamp |
| 2398 \newif\ifmarkupkey |
| 2399 %\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. |
| 2400 %\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. |
| 2401 \newif\ifmarkupcode |
| 2402 \newif\ifmarkupkbd |
| 2403 %\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. |
| 2404 %\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. |
| 2405 \newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). |
| 2406 \newif\ifmarkupexample |
| 2407 \newif\ifmarkupverb |
| 2408 \newif\ifmarkupverbatim |
| 2409 |
| 2410 \let\currentmarkupstyle\empty |
| 2411 |
| 2412 \def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% |
| 2413 \csname markup#1true\endcsname |
| 2414 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% |
| 2415 \markupstylesetup |
| 2416 } |
| 2417 |
| 2418 \let\markupstylesetup\empty |
| 2419 |
| 2420 \def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% |
| 2421 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup |
| 2422 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% |
| 2423 \def#1% |
| 2424 } |
| 2425 |
| 2426 % Markup style setup for left and right quotes. |
| 2427 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% |
| 2428 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\en
dcsname |
| 2429 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi |
| 2430 } |
| 2431 |
| 2432 \defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% |
| 2433 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\en
dcsname |
| 2434 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi |
| 2435 } |
| 2436 |
| 2437 { |
| 2438 \catcode`\'=\active |
| 2439 \catcode`\`=\active |
| 2440 |
| 2441 \gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} |
| 2442 \gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} |
| 2443 |
| 2444 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} |
| 2445 \gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} |
| 2446 |
| 2447 \gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft} |
| 2448 } |
| 2449 |
| 2450 \let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft |
| 2451 \let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright |
| 2452 \let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft |
| 2453 \let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright |
| 2454 \let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft |
| 2455 \let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright |
| 2456 \let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft |
| 2457 \let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright |
| 2458 |
| 2459 \let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft |
| 2460 \let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft |
| 2461 |
| 2462 % Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right |
| 2463 % quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote |
| 2464 % from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it |
| 2465 % the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least |
| 2466 % evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the |
| 2467 % regular 0x27. |
| 2468 % |
| 2469 \def\codequoteright{% |
| 2470 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax |
| 2471 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax |
| 2472 '% |
| 2473 \else \char'15 \fi |
| 2474 \else \char'15 \fi |
| 2475 } |
| 2476 % |
| 2477 % and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. |
| 2478 % Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like |
| 2479 % the code environments to do likewise. |
| 2480 % |
| 2481 \def\codequoteleft{% |
| 2482 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax |
| 2483 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax |
| 2484 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 |
| 2485 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. |
| 2486 \relax`% |
| 2487 \else \char'22 \fi |
| 2488 \else \char'22 \fi |
| 2489 } |
| 2490 |
| 2491 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. |
| 2492 \def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} |
| 2493 |
| 2494 % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks |
| 2495 \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 |
| 2496 |
| 2497 %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans |
| 2498 %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic |
| 2499 |
| 2500 % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction |
| 2501 % unless the following character is such as not to need one. |
| 2502 \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else |
| 2503 \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} |
| 2504 \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
| 2505 \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
| 2506 |
| 2507 % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. |
| 2508 % @var is set to this for defun arguments. |
| 2509 \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
| 2510 |
| 2511 % @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want |
| 2512 % ttsl for book titles, do we? |
| 2513 \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
| 2514 |
| 2515 \let\i=\smartitalic |
| 2516 \let\slanted=\smartslanted |
| 2517 \def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}} |
| 2518 \let\dfn=\smartslanted |
| 2519 \let\emph=\smartitalic |
| 2520 |
| 2521 % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. |
| 2522 \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font |
| 2523 \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font |
| 2524 \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font |
| 2525 |
| 2526 % @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. |
| 2527 \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
| 2528 \let\strong=\b |
| 2529 |
| 2530 % @sansserif, explicit sans. |
| 2531 \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} |
| 2532 |
| 2533 % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at |
| 2534 % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the |
| 2535 % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. |
| 2536 % |
| 2537 \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} |
| 2538 \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } |
| 2539 |
| 2540 % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. |
| 2541 % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and |
| 2542 % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. |
| 2543 % |
| 2544 \catcode`@=11 |
| 2545 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% |
| 2546 \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m |
| 2547 \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m |
| 2548 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends |
| 2549 } |
| 2550 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% |
| 2551 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 |
| 2552 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 |
| 2553 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends |
| 2554 } |
| 2555 \catcode`@=\other |
| 2556 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default |
| 2557 |
| 2558 % @t, explicit typewriter. |
| 2559 \def\t#1{% |
| 2560 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% |
| 2561 \null |
| 2562 } |
| 2563 |
| 2564 % @samp. |
| 2565 \def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} |
| 2566 |
| 2567 % definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. |
| 2568 %\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} |
| 2569 %\font\keysy=cmsy9 |
| 2570 %\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% |
| 2571 % \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% |
| 2572 % \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt |
| 2573 % \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% |
| 2574 % \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% |
| 2575 % \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} |
| 2576 |
| 2577 % definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already |
| 2578 % monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But |
| 2579 % if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. |
| 2580 % |
| 2581 \def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key} |
| 2582 \nohyphenation |
| 2583 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi |
| 2584 #1}\null} |
| 2585 |
| 2586 % ctrl is no longer a Texinfo command. |
| 2587 \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} |
| 2588 |
| 2589 % @file, @option are the same as @samp. |
| 2590 \let\file=\samp |
| 2591 \let\option=\samp |
| 2592 |
| 2593 % @code is a modification of @t, |
| 2594 % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. |
| 2595 \def\tclose#1{% |
| 2596 {% |
| 2597 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. |
| 2598 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font |
| 2599 % |
| 2600 % Switch to typewriter. |
| 2601 \tt |
| 2602 % |
| 2603 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. |
| 2604 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% |
| 2605 % |
| 2606 % Turn off hyphenation. |
| 2607 \nohyphenation |
| 2608 % |
| 2609 \rawbackslash |
| 2610 \plainfrenchspacing |
| 2611 #1% |
| 2612 }% |
| 2613 \null |
| 2614 } |
| 2615 |
| 2616 % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. |
| 2617 % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes |
| 2618 % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. |
| 2619 |
| 2620 % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control |
| 2621 % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. |
| 2622 % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) |
| 2623 % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. |
| 2624 % -- rms. |
| 2625 { |
| 2626 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active |
| 2627 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active |
| 2628 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions |
| 2629 % |
| 2630 \global\def\code{\begingroup |
| 2631 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% |
| 2632 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. |
| 2633 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active |
| 2634 \ifallowcodebreaks |
| 2635 \let-\codedash |
| 2636 \let_\codeunder |
| 2637 \else |
| 2638 \let-\realdash |
| 2639 \let_\realunder |
| 2640 \fi |
| 2641 \codex |
| 2642 } |
| 2643 } |
| 2644 |
| 2645 \def\realdash{-} |
| 2646 \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} |
| 2647 \def\codeunder{% |
| 2648 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ |
| 2649 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) |
| 2650 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us |
| 2651 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. |
| 2652 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode |
| 2653 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. |
| 2654 \else\normalunderscore \fi |
| 2655 \discretionary{}{}{}}% |
| 2656 {\_}% |
| 2657 } |
| 2658 \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
| 2659 |
| 2660 % An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., |
| 2661 % each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in |
| 2662 % some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in |
| 2663 % general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this. |
| 2664 % |
| 2665 \newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue |
| 2666 |
| 2667 \def\keywordtrue{true} |
| 2668 \def\keywordfalse{false} |
| 2669 |
| 2670 \parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% |
| 2671 \def\txiarg{#1}% |
| 2672 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue |
| 2673 \allowcodebreakstrue |
| 2674 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse |
| 2675 \allowcodebreaksfalse |
| 2676 \else |
| 2677 \errhelp = \EMsimple |
| 2678 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}% |
| 2679 \fi\fi |
| 2680 } |
| 2681 |
| 2682 % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
| 2683 % then @kbd has no effect. |
| 2684 \def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}} |
| 2685 |
| 2686 % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), |
| 2687 % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), |
| 2688 % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). |
| 2689 \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% |
| 2690 \def\txiarg{#1}% |
| 2691 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct |
| 2692 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% |
| 2693 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample |
| 2694 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
| 2695 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode |
| 2696 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
| 2697 \else |
| 2698 \errhelp = \EMsimple |
| 2699 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}% |
| 2700 \fi\fi\fi |
| 2701 } |
| 2702 \def\worddistinct{distinct} |
| 2703 \def\wordexample{example} |
| 2704 \def\wordcode{code} |
| 2705 |
| 2706 % Default is `distinct'. |
| 2707 \kbdinputstyle distinct |
| 2708 |
| 2709 \def\xkey{\key} |
| 2710 \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% |
| 2711 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% |
| 2712 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi |
| 2713 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi} |
| 2714 |
| 2715 % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. |
| 2716 \let\indicateurl=\code |
| 2717 \let\env=\code |
| 2718 \let\command=\code |
| 2719 |
| 2720 % @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} |
| 2721 \def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} |
| 2722 |
| 2723 % @clickstyle @arrow (by default) |
| 2724 \parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} |
| 2725 \def\click{\arrow} |
| 2726 |
| 2727 % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) |
| 2728 % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third |
| 2729 % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url |
| 2730 % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in |
| 2731 % a hypertex \special here. |
| 2732 % |
| 2733 \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} |
| 2734 \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup |
| 2735 \unsepspaces |
| 2736 \pdfurl{#1}% |
| 2737 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% |
| 2738 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
| 2739 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that |
| 2740 \else |
| 2741 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
| 2742 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
| 2743 \ifpdf |
| 2744 \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it |
| 2745 \else |
| 2746 \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url |
| 2747 \fi |
| 2748 \else |
| 2749 \code{#1}% only url given, so show it |
| 2750 \fi |
| 2751 \fi |
| 2752 \endlink |
| 2753 \endgroup} |
| 2754 |
| 2755 % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. |
| 2756 % |
| 2757 \let\url=\uref |
| 2758 |
| 2759 % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. |
| 2760 % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. |
| 2761 % |
| 2762 %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} |
| 2763 \ifpdf |
| 2764 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} |
| 2765 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup |
| 2766 \unsepspaces |
| 2767 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% |
| 2768 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
| 2769 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi |
| 2770 \endlink |
| 2771 \endgroup} |
| 2772 \else |
| 2773 \let\email=\uref |
| 2774 \fi |
| 2775 |
| 2776 % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the |
| 2777 % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. |
| 2778 % |
| 2779 \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} |
| 2780 |
| 2781 % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', |
| 2782 % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for |
| 2783 % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. |
| 2784 %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} |
| 2785 |
| 2786 % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. |
| 2787 % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for |
| 2788 % all-uppercase. |
| 2789 % |
| 2790 \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} |
| 2791 \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% |
| 2792 {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% |
| 2793 \def\temp{#2}% |
| 2794 \ifx\temp\empty \else |
| 2795 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% |
| 2796 \fi |
| 2797 } |
| 2798 |
| 2799 % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. |
| 2800 % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. |
| 2801 % |
| 2802 \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} |
| 2803 \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% |
| 2804 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% |
| 2805 \def\temp{#2}% |
| 2806 \ifx\temp\empty \else |
| 2807 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% |
| 2808 \fi |
| 2809 } |
| 2810 |
| 2811 |
| 2812 \message{glyphs,} |
| 2813 |
| 2814 % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. |
| 2815 % |
| 2816 % Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of |
| 2817 % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. |
| 2818 % |
| 2819 \def\point{$\star$} |
| 2820 \def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} |
| 2821 \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} |
| 2822 \def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} |
| 2823 \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} |
| 2824 \def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} |
| 2825 |
| 2826 % The @error{} command. |
| 2827 % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
| 2828 % |
| 2829 \newbox\errorbox |
| 2830 % |
| 2831 {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. |
| 2832 \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules |
| 2833 % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) |
| 2834 \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt} |
| 2835 % |
| 2836 \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil |
| 2837 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. |
| 2838 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. |
| 2839 \vbox{% |
| 2840 \hrule height\dimen2 |
| 2841 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. |
| 2842 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. |
| 2843 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. |
| 2844 \hrule height\dimen2} |
| 2845 \hfil} |
| 2846 % |
| 2847 \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} |
| 2848 |
| 2849 % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. |
| 2850 % |
| 2851 \def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
| 2852 |
| 2853 % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. |
| 2854 % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik |
| 2855 % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and |
| 2856 % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). |
| 2857 % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. |
| 2858 % |
| 2859 % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore |
| 2860 % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular |
| 2861 % font height. |
| 2862 % |
| 2863 % feymr - regular |
| 2864 % feymo - slanted |
| 2865 % feybr - bold |
| 2866 % feybo - bold slanted |
| 2867 % |
| 2868 % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. |
| 2869 % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. |
| 2870 % Hmm. |
| 2871 % |
| 2872 % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? |
| 2873 % Hope not. |
| 2874 % |
| 2875 % |
| 2876 \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} |
| 2877 \def\eurofont{% |
| 2878 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in |
| 2879 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that |
| 2880 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the |
| 2881 % font installed. |
| 2882 % |
| 2883 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale |
| 2884 % that to the current nominal size. |
| 2885 % |
| 2886 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but |
| 2887 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. |
| 2888 % |
| 2889 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% |
| 2890 % |
| 2891 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename |
| 2892 % bold: |
| 2893 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize |
| 2894 \else |
| 2895 % regular: |
| 2896 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize |
| 2897 \fi |
| 2898 \thiseurofont |
| 2899 } |
| 2900 |
| 2901 % Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't |
| 2902 % use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original |
| 2903 % macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition. |
| 2904 \def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} |
| 2905 \def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} |
| 2906 \def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} |
| 2907 \def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} |
| 2908 \def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} |
| 2909 \def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} |
| 2910 \def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} |
| 2911 \def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} |
| 2912 % |
| 2913 % This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but |
| 2914 % we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the |
| 2915 % tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer |
| 2916 % dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. |
| 2917 % |
| 2918 % ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using |
| 2919 % the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in |
| 2920 % the same EC font. |
| 2921 \def\ogonek#1{{% |
| 2922 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 2923 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek |
| 2924 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek |
| 2925 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek |
| 2926 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek |
| 2927 \else |
| 2928 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% |
| 2929 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% |
| 2930 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% |
| 2931 \fi |
| 2932 \fi\fi\fi\fi |
| 2933 }% |
| 2934 } |
| 2935 \def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} |
| 2936 \def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} |
| 2937 \def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} |
| 2938 \def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} |
| 2939 % |
| 2940 \def\ecfont{% |
| 2941 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this |
| 2942 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German |
| 2943 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so |
| 2944 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. |
| 2945 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% |
| 2946 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% |
| 2947 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename |
| 2948 % bold: |
| 2949 \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize |
| 2950 \else |
| 2951 % regular: |
| 2952 \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize |
| 2953 \fi |
| 2954 \thisecfont |
| 2955 } |
| 2956 |
| 2957 % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really |
| 2958 % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. |
| 2959 % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. |
| 2960 % |
| 2961 \def\registeredsymbol{% |
| 2962 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% |
| 2963 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% |
| 2964 }$% |
| 2965 } |
| 2966 |
| 2967 % @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. |
| 2968 % |
| 2969 \def\textdegree{$^\circ$} |
| 2970 |
| 2971 % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: |
| 2972 % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 |
| 2973 % so we'll define it if necessary. |
| 2974 % |
| 2975 \ifx\Orb\undefined |
| 2976 \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} |
| 2977 \fi |
| 2978 |
| 2979 % Quotes. |
| 2980 \chardef\quotedblleft="5C |
| 2981 \chardef\quotedblright=`\" |
| 2982 \chardef\quoteleft=`\` |
| 2983 \chardef\quoteright=`\' |
| 2984 |
| 2985 |
| 2986 \message{page headings,} |
| 2987 |
| 2988 \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in |
| 2989 \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc |
| 2990 |
| 2991 % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. |
| 2992 \newif\ifseenauthor |
| 2993 \newif\iffinishedtitlepage |
| 2994 |
| 2995 % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the |
| 2996 % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. |
| 2997 % |
| 2998 \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage |
| 2999 \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue |
| 3000 \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage |
| 3001 \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue |
| 3002 |
| 3003 \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#
1}% |
| 3004 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
| 3005 |
| 3006 \envdef\titlepage{% |
| 3007 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. |
| 3008 \begingroup |
| 3009 \parindent=0pt \textfonts |
| 3010 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. |
| 3011 \vglue\titlepagetopglue |
| 3012 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. |
| 3013 \finishedtitlepagetrue |
| 3014 % |
| 3015 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space |
| 3016 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. |
| 3017 \let\oldpage = \page |
| 3018 \def\page{% |
| 3019 \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
| 3020 \finishtitlepage |
| 3021 \fi |
| 3022 \let\page = \oldpage |
| 3023 \page |
| 3024 \null |
| 3025 }% |
| 3026 } |
| 3027 |
| 3028 \def\Etitlepage{% |
| 3029 \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
| 3030 \finishtitlepage |
| 3031 \fi |
| 3032 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, |
| 3033 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. |
| 3034 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page |
| 3035 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. |
| 3036 \oldpage |
| 3037 \endgroup |
| 3038 % |
| 3039 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are |
| 3040 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. |
| 3041 \HEADINGSon |
| 3042 % |
| 3043 % If they want short, they certainly want long too. |
| 3044 \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage |
| 3045 \shortcontents |
| 3046 \contents |
| 3047 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax |
| 3048 \global\let\contents = \relax |
| 3049 \fi |
| 3050 % |
| 3051 \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage |
| 3052 \contents |
| 3053 \global\let\contents = \relax |
| 3054 \global\let\shortcontents = \relax |
| 3055 \fi |
| 3056 } |
| 3057 |
| 3058 \def\finishtitlepage{% |
| 3059 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize |
| 3060 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue |
| 3061 \finishedtitlepagetrue |
| 3062 } |
| 3063 |
| 3064 %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: |
| 3065 |
| 3066 \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm |
| 3067 \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} |
| 3068 |
| 3069 \parseargdef\title{% |
| 3070 \checkenv\titlepage |
| 3071 \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1} |
| 3072 % print a rule at the page bottom also. |
| 3073 \finishedtitlepagefalse |
| 3074 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt |
| 3075 } |
| 3076 |
| 3077 \parseargdef\subtitle{% |
| 3078 \checkenv\titlepage |
| 3079 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% |
| 3080 } |
| 3081 |
| 3082 % @author should come last, but may come many times. |
| 3083 % It can also be used inside @quotation. |
| 3084 % |
| 3085 \parseargdef\author{% |
| 3086 \def\temp{\quotation}% |
| 3087 \ifx\thisenv\temp |
| 3088 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. |
| 3089 \else |
| 3090 \checkenv\titlepage |
| 3091 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi |
| 3092 {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}% |
| 3093 \fi |
| 3094 } |
| 3095 |
| 3096 |
| 3097 %%% Set up page headings and footings. |
| 3098 |
| 3099 \let\thispage=\folio |
| 3100 |
| 3101 \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages |
| 3102 \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages |
| 3103 \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages |
| 3104 \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages |
| 3105 |
| 3106 % Now make TeX use those variables |
| 3107 \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
| 3108 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} |
| 3109 \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline |
| 3110 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} |
| 3111 \let\HEADINGShook=\relax |
| 3112 |
| 3113 % Commands to set those variables. |
| 3114 % For example, this is what @headings on does |
| 3115 % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter |
| 3116 % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle |
| 3117 % @evenfooting @thisfile|| |
| 3118 % @oddfooting ||@thisfile |
| 3119 |
| 3120 |
| 3121 \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} |
| 3122 \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
| 3123 \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% |
| 3124 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 3125 |
| 3126 \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} |
| 3127 \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
| 3128 \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% |
| 3129 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 3130 |
| 3131 \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% |
| 3132 |
| 3133 \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} |
| 3134 \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
| 3135 \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% |
| 3136 \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
| 3137 |
| 3138 \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} |
| 3139 \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} |
| 3140 \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% |
| 3141 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% |
| 3142 % |
| 3143 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume |
| 3144 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. |
| 3145 \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt |
| 3146 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt |
| 3147 } |
| 3148 |
| 3149 \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} |
| 3150 |
| 3151 % @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page |
| 3152 % @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page |
| 3153 % |
| 3154 % The same set of arguments for: |
| 3155 % |
| 3156 % @oddheadingmarks |
| 3157 % @evenfootingmarks |
| 3158 % @oddfootingmarks |
| 3159 % @everyheadingmarks |
| 3160 % @everyfootingmarks |
| 3161 |
| 3162 \def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} |
| 3163 \def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} |
| 3164 \def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} |
| 3165 \def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} |
| 3166 \def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} |
| 3167 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } |
| 3168 \def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} |
| 3169 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } |
| 3170 % #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. |
| 3171 \def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% |
| 3172 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname |
| 3173 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp |
| 3174 } |
| 3175 |
| 3176 \everyheadingmarks bottom |
| 3177 \everyfootingmarks bottom |
| 3178 |
| 3179 % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. |
| 3180 % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. |
| 3181 % @headings off turns them off. |
| 3182 % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. |
| 3183 % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
| 3184 % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
| 3185 % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. |
| 3186 % By default, they are off at the start of a document, |
| 3187 % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. |
| 3188 |
| 3189 \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} |
| 3190 |
| 3191 \def\HEADINGSoff{% |
| 3192 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 3193 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} |
| 3194 \HEADINGSoff |
| 3195 % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. |
| 3196 % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, |
| 3197 % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document |
| 3198 % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top |
| 3199 % edge of all pages. |
| 3200 \def\HEADINGSdouble{% |
| 3201 \global\pageno=1 |
| 3202 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 3203 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
| 3204 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
| 3205 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 3206 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
| 3207 } |
| 3208 \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
| 3209 |
| 3210 % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, |
| 3211 % page number on top right. |
| 3212 \def\HEADINGSsingle{% |
| 3213 \global\pageno=1 |
| 3214 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 3215 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
| 3216 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 3217 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 3218 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
| 3219 } |
| 3220 \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} |
| 3221 |
| 3222 \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} |
| 3223 \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter |
| 3224 \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% |
| 3225 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 3226 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
| 3227 \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
| 3228 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 3229 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
| 3230 } |
| 3231 |
| 3232 \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} |
| 3233 \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% |
| 3234 \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
| 3235 \global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
| 3236 \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 3237 \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
| 3238 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
| 3239 } |
| 3240 |
| 3241 % Subroutines used in generating headings |
| 3242 % This produces Day Month Year style of output. |
| 3243 % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set |
| 3244 % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). |
| 3245 \ifx\today\undefined |
| 3246 \def\today{% |
| 3247 \number\day\space |
| 3248 \ifcase\month |
| 3249 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr |
| 3250 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug |
| 3251 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec |
| 3252 \fi |
| 3253 \space\number\year} |
| 3254 \fi |
| 3255 |
| 3256 % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. |
| 3257 % It generates no output of its own. |
| 3258 \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} |
| 3259 \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} |
| 3260 |
| 3261 |
| 3262 \message{tables,} |
| 3263 % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). |
| 3264 |
| 3265 % default indentation of table text |
| 3266 \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in |
| 3267 % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text |
| 3268 \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in |
| 3269 % margin between end of table item and start of table text. |
| 3270 \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in |
| 3271 |
| 3272 % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin |
| 3273 \newdimen\itemmax |
| 3274 |
| 3275 % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with |
| 3276 % these defs. |
| 3277 % They also define \itemindex |
| 3278 % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). |
| 3279 |
| 3280 \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip |
| 3281 |
| 3282 \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} |
| 3283 |
| 3284 \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} |
| 3285 \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} |
| 3286 |
| 3287 \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % |
| 3288 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip |
| 3289 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent |
| 3290 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% |
| 3291 \itemindex{#1}% |
| 3292 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. |
| 3293 % |
| 3294 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line |
| 3295 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that |
| 3296 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next |
| 3297 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the |
| 3298 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. |
| 3299 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax |
| 3300 % |
| 3301 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, |
| 3302 % but leave it ragged-right. |
| 3303 \begingroup |
| 3304 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent |
| 3305 \advance\hsize by\tableindent |
| 3306 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil |
| 3307 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par |
| 3308 \endgroup |
| 3309 % |
| 3310 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the |
| 3311 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. |
| 3312 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip |
| 3313 % |
| 3314 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if |
| 3315 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no |
| 3316 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would |
| 3317 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this |
| 3318 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert |
| 3319 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. |
| 3320 % |
| 3321 \penalty 10001 |
| 3322 \endgroup |
| 3323 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse |
| 3324 \else |
| 3325 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the |
| 3326 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. |
| 3327 \noindent |
| 3328 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in |
| 3329 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and |
| 3330 % eventually be printed. |
| 3331 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent |
| 3332 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 |
| 3333 \unhbox0 |
| 3334 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 |
| 3335 \endgroup |
| 3336 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue |
| 3337 \fi |
| 3338 } |
| 3339 |
| 3340 \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} |
| 3341 \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} |
| 3342 |
| 3343 % @table, @ftable, @vtable. |
| 3344 \envdef\table{% |
| 3345 \let\itemindex\gobble |
| 3346 \tablecheck{table}% |
| 3347 } |
| 3348 \envdef\ftable{% |
| 3349 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% |
| 3350 \tablecheck{ftable}% |
| 3351 } |
| 3352 \envdef\vtable{% |
| 3353 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% |
| 3354 \tablecheck{vtable}% |
| 3355 } |
| 3356 \def\tablecheck#1{% |
| 3357 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active |
| 3358 \endgroup |
| 3359 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is |
| 3360 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% |
| 3361 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% |
| 3362 \else |
| 3363 \let\next\tablex |
| 3364 \fi |
| 3365 \next |
| 3366 } |
| 3367 \def\tablex#1{% |
| 3368 \def\itemindicate{#1}% |
| 3369 \parsearg\tabley |
| 3370 } |
| 3371 \def\tabley#1{% |
| 3372 {% |
| 3373 \makevalueexpandable |
| 3374 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% |
| 3375 \expandafter |
| 3376 }\temp \endtablez |
| 3377 } |
| 3378 \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% |
| 3379 \aboveenvbreak |
| 3380 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi |
| 3381 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi |
| 3382 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi |
| 3383 \itemmax=\tableindent |
| 3384 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin |
| 3385 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent |
| 3386 \exdentamount=\tableindent |
| 3387 \parindent = 0pt |
| 3388 \parskip = \smallskipamount |
| 3389 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi |
| 3390 \let\item = \internalBitem |
| 3391 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx |
| 3392 } |
| 3393 \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} |
| 3394 \let\Eftable\Etable |
| 3395 \let\Evtable\Etable |
| 3396 \let\Eitemize\Etable |
| 3397 \let\Eenumerate\Etable |
| 3398 |
| 3399 % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize |
| 3400 |
| 3401 \newcount \itemno |
| 3402 |
| 3403 \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} |
| 3404 |
| 3405 \def\doitemize#1{% |
| 3406 \aboveenvbreak |
| 3407 \itemmax=\itemindent |
| 3408 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin |
| 3409 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent |
| 3410 \exdentamount=\itemindent |
| 3411 \parindent=0pt |
| 3412 \parskip=\smallskipamount |
| 3413 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi |
| 3414 \def\itemcontents{#1}% |
| 3415 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. |
| 3416 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi |
| 3417 \let\item=\itemizeitem |
| 3418 } |
| 3419 |
| 3420 % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. |
| 3421 % |
| 3422 \def\itemizeitem{% |
| 3423 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations |
| 3424 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break |
| 3425 {% |
| 3426 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a |
| 3427 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have |
| 3428 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero |
| 3429 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the |
| 3430 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there |
| 3431 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much |
| 3432 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least |
| 3433 % that's the theory. |
| 3434 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi |
| 3435 \noindent |
| 3436 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% |
| 3437 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. |
| 3438 \flushcr |
| 3439 } |
| 3440 |
| 3441 % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in |
| 3442 % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. |
| 3443 % |
| 3444 \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% |
| 3445 |
| 3446 % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, |
| 3447 % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No |
| 3448 % argument is the same as `1'. |
| 3449 % |
| 3450 \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} |
| 3451 \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% |
| 3452 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. |
| 3453 \def\thearg{#1}% |
| 3454 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi |
| 3455 % |
| 3456 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a |
| 3457 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. |
| 3458 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. |
| 3459 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at |
| 3460 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) |
| 3461 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark |
| 3462 \ifx\rest\empty |
| 3463 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. |
| 3464 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. |
| 3465 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and |
| 3466 % not equal to itself. |
| 3467 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. |
| 3468 % |
| 3469 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from |
| 3470 % continuing to look for a <number>. |
| 3471 % |
| 3472 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax |
| 3473 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) |
| 3474 \else |
| 3475 % It's a letter. |
| 3476 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax |
| 3477 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter |
| 3478 \else |
| 3479 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter |
| 3480 \fi |
| 3481 \fi |
| 3482 \else |
| 3483 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. |
| 3484 \numericenumerate |
| 3485 \fi |
| 3486 } |
| 3487 |
| 3488 % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is |
| 3489 % given in \thearg. |
| 3490 % |
| 3491 \def\numericenumerate{% |
| 3492 \itemno = \thearg |
| 3493 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% |
| 3494 } |
| 3495 |
| 3496 % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. |
| 3497 \def\lowercaseenumerate{% |
| 3498 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg |
| 3499 \startenumeration{% |
| 3500 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. |
| 3501 \ifnum\itemno=0 |
| 3502 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger |
| 3503 alphabet}% |
| 3504 \fi |
| 3505 \char\lccode\itemno |
| 3506 }% |
| 3507 } |
| 3508 |
| 3509 % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. |
| 3510 \def\uppercaseenumerate{% |
| 3511 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg |
| 3512 \startenumeration{% |
| 3513 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. |
| 3514 \ifnum\itemno=0 |
| 3515 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger |
| 3516 alphabet} |
| 3517 \fi |
| 3518 \char\uccode\itemno |
| 3519 }% |
| 3520 } |
| 3521 |
| 3522 % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the |
| 3523 % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in |
| 3524 % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. |
| 3525 % |
| 3526 \def\startenumeration#1{% |
| 3527 \advance\itemno by -1 |
| 3528 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr |
| 3529 } |
| 3530 |
| 3531 % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg |
| 3532 % to @enumerate. |
| 3533 % |
| 3534 \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} |
| 3535 \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} |
| 3536 \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} |
| 3537 \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} |
| 3538 |
| 3539 |
| 3540 % @multitable macros |
| 3541 % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 |
| 3542 % |
| 3543 % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. |
| 3544 % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width |
| 3545 % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, |
| 3546 % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. |
| 3547 |
| 3548 % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. |
| 3549 |
| 3550 % To make preamble: |
| 3551 % |
| 3552 % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: |
| 3553 % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 |
| 3554 % @item ... |
| 3555 % |
| 3556 % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total |
| 3557 % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many |
| 3558 % columns as desired. |
| 3559 |
| 3560 |
| 3561 % Or use a template: |
| 3562 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
| 3563 % @item ... |
| 3564 % using the widest term desired in each column. |
| 3565 |
| 3566 % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column |
| 3567 % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's |
| 3568 % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, |
| 3569 % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. |
| 3570 |
| 3571 % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt |
| 3572 % if they are. |
| 3573 |
| 3574 % Sample multitable: |
| 3575 |
| 3576 % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
| 3577 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col |
| 3578 % @item |
| 3579 % first col stuff |
| 3580 % @tab |
| 3581 % second col stuff |
| 3582 % @tab |
| 3583 % third col |
| 3584 % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff |
| 3585 % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. |
| 3586 % |
| 3587 % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. |
| 3588 % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. |
| 3589 % @end multitable |
| 3590 |
| 3591 % Default dimensions may be reset by user. |
| 3592 % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. |
| 3593 % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. |
| 3594 % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. |
| 3595 % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline |
| 3596 % to baseline. |
| 3597 % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. |
| 3598 % |
| 3599 \newskip\multitableparskip |
| 3600 \newskip\multitableparindent |
| 3601 \newdimen\multitablecolspace |
| 3602 \newskip\multitablelinespace |
| 3603 \multitableparskip=0pt |
| 3604 \multitableparindent=6pt |
| 3605 \multitablecolspace=12pt |
| 3606 \multitablelinespace=0pt |
| 3607 |
| 3608 % Macros used to set up halign preamble: |
| 3609 % |
| 3610 \let\endsetuptable\relax |
| 3611 \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} |
| 3612 \let\columnfractions\relax |
| 3613 \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} |
| 3614 \newif\ifsetpercent |
| 3615 |
| 3616 % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might |
| 3617 % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. |
| 3618 % |
| 3619 \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% |
| 3620 \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
| 3621 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% |
| 3622 \setuptable |
| 3623 } |
| 3624 |
| 3625 \newcount\colcount |
| 3626 \def\setuptable#1{% |
| 3627 \def\firstarg{#1}% |
| 3628 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable |
| 3629 \let\go = \relax |
| 3630 \else |
| 3631 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions |
| 3632 \global\setpercenttrue |
| 3633 \else |
| 3634 \ifsetpercent |
| 3635 \let\go\pickupwholefraction |
| 3636 \else |
| 3637 \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
| 3638 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a |
| 3639 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. |
| 3640 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
| 3641 \fi |
| 3642 \fi |
| 3643 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction |
| 3644 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so |
| 3645 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. |
| 3646 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% |
| 3647 \else |
| 3648 \let\go = \setuptable |
| 3649 \fi% |
| 3650 \fi |
| 3651 \go |
| 3652 } |
| 3653 |
| 3654 % multitable-only commands. |
| 3655 % |
| 3656 % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. |
| 3657 % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group |
| 3658 % of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. |
| 3659 \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% |
| 3660 % |
| 3661 % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template |
| 3662 % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until |
| 3663 % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. |
| 3664 % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. |
| 3665 \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% |
| 3666 |
| 3667 % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: |
| 3668 % |
| 3669 \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. |
| 3670 % |
| 3671 \envdef\multitable{% |
| 3672 \vskip\parskip |
| 3673 \startsavinginserts |
| 3674 % |
| 3675 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. |
| 3676 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries |
| 3677 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka |
| 3678 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. |
| 3679 \def\item{\crcr}% |
| 3680 % |
| 3681 \tolerance=9500 |
| 3682 \hbadness=9500 |
| 3683 \setmultitablespacing |
| 3684 \parskip=\multitableparskip |
| 3685 \parindent=\multitableparindent |
| 3686 \overfullrule=0pt |
| 3687 \global\colcount=0 |
| 3688 % |
| 3689 \everycr = {% |
| 3690 \noalign{% |
| 3691 \global\everytab={}% |
| 3692 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. |
| 3693 % Check for saved footnotes, etc. |
| 3694 \checkinserts |
| 3695 % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. |
| 3696 %\filbreak |
| 3697 % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the |
| 3698 % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the |
| 3699 % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. |
| 3700 }% |
| 3701 }% |
| 3702 % |
| 3703 \parsearg\domultitable |
| 3704 } |
| 3705 \def\domultitable#1{% |
| 3706 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: |
| 3707 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable |
| 3708 % |
| 3709 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will |
| 3710 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. |
| 3711 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and |
| 3712 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. |
| 3713 \halign\bgroup &% |
| 3714 \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
| 3715 \multistrut |
| 3716 \vtop{% |
| 3717 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: |
| 3718 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname |
| 3719 % |
| 3720 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other |
| 3721 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after |
| 3722 % the first one. |
| 3723 % |
| 3724 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace |
| 3725 % to the width of each template entry. |
| 3726 % |
| 3727 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will |
| 3728 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip |
| 3729 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at |
| 3730 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. |
| 3731 % |
| 3732 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. |
| 3733 \rightskip=0pt |
| 3734 \ifnum\colcount=1 |
| 3735 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. |
| 3736 \advance\hsize by\leftskip |
| 3737 \else |
| 3738 \ifsetpercent \else |
| 3739 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
| 3740 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. |
| 3741 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace |
| 3742 \fi |
| 3743 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: |
| 3744 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace |
| 3745 \fi |
| 3746 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious |
| 3747 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the |
| 3748 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. |
| 3749 % For example: |
| 3750 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 |
| 3751 % @item @code{#} |
| 3752 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. |
| 3753 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively |
| 3754 % marking characters. |
| 3755 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut |
| 3756 }\cr |
| 3757 } |
| 3758 \def\Emultitable{% |
| 3759 \crcr |
| 3760 \egroup % end the \halign |
| 3761 \global\setpercentfalse |
| 3762 } |
| 3763 |
| 3764 \def\setmultitablespacing{% |
| 3765 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing |
| 3766 % |
| 3767 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in |
| 3768 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on |
| 3769 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. |
| 3770 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. |
| 3771 \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
| 3772 \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip |
| 3773 \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 |
| 3774 \fi |
| 3775 %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
| 3776 %% table. If not, do nothing. |
| 3777 %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. |
| 3778 \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace |
| 3779 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
| 3780 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
| 3781 %% than skip between lines in the table. |
| 3782 \fi% |
| 3783 \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt |
| 3784 \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
| 3785 \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
| 3786 %% than skip between lines in the table. |
| 3787 \fi} |
| 3788 |
| 3789 |
| 3790 \message{conditionals,} |
| 3791 |
| 3792 % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, |
| 3793 % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't |
| 3794 % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we |
| 3795 % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't |
| 3796 % attempt to close an environment group. |
| 3797 % |
| 3798 \def\makecond#1{% |
| 3799 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax |
| 3800 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 |
| 3801 } |
| 3802 \makecond{iftex} |
| 3803 \makecond{ifnotdocbook} |
| 3804 \makecond{ifnothtml} |
| 3805 \makecond{ifnotinfo} |
| 3806 \makecond{ifnotplaintext} |
| 3807 \makecond{ifnotxml} |
| 3808 |
| 3809 % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. |
| 3810 % |
| 3811 \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} |
| 3812 \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} |
| 3813 \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} |
| 3814 \def\html{\doignore{html}} |
| 3815 \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} |
| 3816 \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
| 3817 \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
| 3818 \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} |
| 3819 \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} |
| 3820 \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} |
| 3821 \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} |
| 3822 \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
| 3823 \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} |
| 3824 |
| 3825 % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. |
| 3826 % |
| 3827 % A count to remember the depth of nesting. |
| 3828 \newcount\doignorecount |
| 3829 |
| 3830 \def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
| 3831 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: |
| 3832 \obeylines |
| 3833 \catcode`\@ = \other |
| 3834 \catcode`\{ = \other |
| 3835 \catcode`\} = \other |
| 3836 % |
| 3837 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. |
| 3838 \spaceisspace |
| 3839 % |
| 3840 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. |
| 3841 \doignorecount = 0 |
| 3842 % |
| 3843 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. |
| 3844 \dodoignore{#1}% |
| 3845 } |
| 3846 |
| 3847 { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. |
| 3848 \obeylines % |
| 3849 % |
| 3850 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% |
| 3851 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. |
| 3852 % |
| 3853 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. |
| 3854 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% |
| 3855 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% |
| 3856 % |
| 3857 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a |
| 3858 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for |
| 3859 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) |
| 3860 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% |
| 3861 % |
| 3862 % And now expand that command. |
| 3863 \doignoretext ^^M% |
| 3864 }% |
| 3865 } |
| 3866 |
| 3867 \def\doignoreyyy#1{% |
| 3868 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 3869 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. |
| 3870 \let\next\doignoretextzzz |
| 3871 \else % Found a nested condition, ... |
| 3872 \advance\doignorecount by 1 |
| 3873 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. |
| 3874 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). |
| 3875 \fi |
| 3876 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. |
| 3877 } |
| 3878 |
| 3879 % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". |
| 3880 % |
| 3881 \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% |
| 3882 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. |
| 3883 \let\next\enddoignore |
| 3884 \else % Still inside a nested condition. |
| 3885 \advance\doignorecount by -1 |
| 3886 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. |
| 3887 \fi |
| 3888 \next |
| 3889 } |
| 3890 |
| 3891 % Finish off ignored text. |
| 3892 { \obeylines% |
| 3893 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim |
| 3894 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional |
| 3895 % would result in a blank line in the output. |
| 3896 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% |
| 3897 } |
| 3898 |
| 3899 |
| 3900 % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. |
| 3901 % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. |
| 3902 % |
| 3903 % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be |
| 3904 % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our |
| 3905 % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we |
| 3906 % didn't need it. |
| 3907 % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. |
| 3908 % |
| 3909 \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} |
| 3910 \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
| 3911 {% |
| 3912 \makevalueexpandable |
| 3913 \def\temp{#2}% |
| 3914 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% |
| 3915 \ifx\temp\empty |
| 3916 \next{}% |
| 3917 \else |
| 3918 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz |
| 3919 \fi |
| 3920 }% |
| 3921 } |
| 3922 % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. |
| 3923 \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} |
| 3924 |
| 3925 % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. |
| 3926 % |
| 3927 \parseargdef\clear{% |
| 3928 {% |
| 3929 \makevalueexpandable |
| 3930 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax |
| 3931 }% |
| 3932 } |
| 3933 |
| 3934 % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. |
| 3935 \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} |
| 3936 \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} |
| 3937 { |
| 3938 \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active |
| 3939 % |
| 3940 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% |
| 3941 \let\value = \expandablevalue |
| 3942 % We don't want these characters active, ... |
| 3943 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other |
| 3944 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if |
| 3945 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. |
| 3946 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. |
| 3947 \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore |
| 3948 } |
| 3949 } |
| 3950 |
| 3951 % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's |
| 3952 % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). |
| 3953 % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since |
| 3954 % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the |
| 3955 % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain |
| 3956 % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work |
| 3957 % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). |
| 3958 % |
| 3959 \def\expandablevalue#1{% |
| 3960 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
| 3961 {[No value for ``#1'']}% |
| 3962 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% |
| 3963 \else |
| 3964 \csname SET#1\endcsname |
| 3965 \fi |
| 3966 } |
| 3967 |
| 3968 % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined |
| 3969 % with @set. |
| 3970 % |
| 3971 % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. |
| 3972 % |
| 3973 \makecond{ifset} |
| 3974 \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} |
| 3975 \def\doifset#1#2{% |
| 3976 {% |
| 3977 \makevalueexpandable |
| 3978 \let\next=\empty |
| 3979 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax |
| 3980 #1% If not set, redefine \next. |
| 3981 \fi |
| 3982 \expandafter |
| 3983 }\next |
| 3984 } |
| 3985 \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} |
| 3986 |
| 3987 % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been |
| 3988 % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. |
| 3989 % |
| 3990 % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the |
| 3991 % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, |
| 3992 % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. |
| 3993 % |
| 3994 \makecond{ifclear} |
| 3995 \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} |
| 3996 \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} |
| 3997 |
| 3998 % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file |
| 3999 % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. |
| 4000 \let\dircategory=\comment |
| 4001 |
| 4002 % @defininfoenclose. |
| 4003 \let\definfoenclose=\comment |
| 4004 |
| 4005 |
| 4006 \message{indexing,} |
| 4007 % Index generation facilities |
| 4008 |
| 4009 % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite |
| 4010 % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. |
| 4011 \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} |
| 4012 |
| 4013 % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. |
| 4014 % It automatically defines \fooindex such that |
| 4015 % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. |
| 4016 % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for |
| 4017 % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. |
| 4018 % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long |
| 4019 % for the sake of vms. |
| 4020 % |
| 4021 \def\newindex#1{% |
| 4022 \iflinks |
| 4023 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname |
| 4024 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
| 4025 \fi |
| 4026 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index |
| 4027 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} |
| 4028 } |
| 4029 |
| 4030 % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} |
| 4031 % |
| 4032 \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} |
| 4033 |
| 4034 % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. |
| 4035 % |
| 4036 \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} |
| 4037 % |
| 4038 \def\newcodeindex#1{% |
| 4039 \iflinks |
| 4040 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname |
| 4041 \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 |
| 4042 \fi |
| 4043 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% |
| 4044 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% |
| 4045 } |
| 4046 |
| 4047 |
| 4048 % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. |
| 4049 % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. |
| 4050 % |
| 4051 % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
| 4052 % inside @code. |
| 4053 % |
| 4054 \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} |
| 4055 \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} |
| 4056 |
| 4057 % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), |
| 4058 % #3 the target index (bar). |
| 4059 \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% |
| 4060 % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up |
| 4061 % closing the target index. |
| 4062 \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax |
| 4063 % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the |
| 4064 % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. |
| 4065 \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
| 4066 \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 |
| 4067 \fi |
| 4068 % redefine \fooindfile: |
| 4069 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname |
| 4070 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp |
| 4071 % redefine \fooindex: |
| 4072 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% |
| 4073 } |
| 4074 |
| 4075 % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. |
| 4076 % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, |
| 4077 % and it is "foo", the name of the index. |
| 4078 |
| 4079 % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. |
| 4080 % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. |
| 4081 |
| 4082 % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} |
| 4083 % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. |
| 4084 |
| 4085 \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} |
| 4086 \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} |
| 4087 |
| 4088 % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. |
| 4089 \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} |
| 4090 \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} |
| 4091 |
| 4092 % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. |
| 4093 % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, |
| 4094 % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. |
| 4095 % |
| 4096 \def\indexdummies{% |
| 4097 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. |
| 4098 \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. |
| 4099 \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% |
| 4100 % |
| 4101 % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. |
| 4102 % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes |
| 4103 % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. |
| 4104 \let\{ = \mylbrace |
| 4105 \let\} = \myrbrace |
| 4106 % |
| 4107 % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is |
| 4108 % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts |
| 4109 % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is, |
| 4110 % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput |
| 4111 % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput |
| 4112 % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that |
| 4113 % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it |
| 4114 % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that |
| 4115 % is still getting written without apparent harm. |
| 4116 % |
| 4117 % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to |
| 4118 % help-texinfo, 22may06): |
| 4119 % @macro funindex {WORD} |
| 4120 % @findex xyz |
| 4121 % @end macro |
| 4122 % ... |
| 4123 % @funindex commtest |
| 4124 % |
| 4125 % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor. |
| 4126 % |
| 4127 % Sample whatsit resulting: |
| 4128 % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}} |
| 4129 % |
| 4130 % So: |
| 4131 \let\endinput = \empty |
| 4132 % |
| 4133 % Do the redefinitions. |
| 4134 \commondummies |
| 4135 } |
| 4136 |
| 4137 % For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to |
| 4138 % redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of |
| 4139 % \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @, |
| 4140 % this will be simpler. |
| 4141 % |
| 4142 \def\atdummies{% |
| 4143 \def\@{@@}% |
| 4144 \def\ {@ }% |
| 4145 \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd |
| 4146 \let\} = \rbraceatcmd |
| 4147 % |
| 4148 % Do the redefinitions. |
| 4149 \commondummies |
| 4150 \otherbackslash |
| 4151 } |
| 4152 |
| 4153 % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. |
| 4154 % |
| 4155 \def\commondummies{% |
| 4156 % |
| 4157 % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively |
| 4158 % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words, |
| 4159 % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for |
| 4160 % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word |
| 4161 % from whatever follows. |
| 4162 % |
| 4163 % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the |
| 4164 % space. |
| 4165 % |
| 4166 % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and |
| 4167 % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then |
| 4168 % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). |
| 4169 % |
| 4170 \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}% |
| 4171 \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}% |
| 4172 \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter |
| 4173 % |
| 4174 \commondummiesnofonts |
| 4175 % |
| 4176 \definedummyletter\_% |
| 4177 % |
| 4178 % Non-English letters. |
| 4179 \definedummyword\AA |
| 4180 \definedummyword\AE |
| 4181 \definedummyword\L |
| 4182 \definedummyword\OE |
| 4183 \definedummyword\O |
| 4184 \definedummyword\aa |
| 4185 \definedummyword\ae |
| 4186 \definedummyword\l |
| 4187 \definedummyword\oe |
| 4188 \definedummyword\o |
| 4189 \definedummyword\ss |
| 4190 \definedummyword\exclamdown |
| 4191 \definedummyword\questiondown |
| 4192 \definedummyword\ordf |
| 4193 \definedummyword\ordm |
| 4194 % |
| 4195 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. |
| 4196 \definedummyword\bf |
| 4197 \definedummyword\gtr |
| 4198 \definedummyword\hat |
| 4199 \definedummyword\less |
| 4200 \definedummyword\sf |
| 4201 \definedummyword\sl |
| 4202 \definedummyword\tclose |
| 4203 \definedummyword\tt |
| 4204 % |
| 4205 \definedummyword\LaTeX |
| 4206 \definedummyword\TeX |
| 4207 % |
| 4208 % Assorted special characters. |
| 4209 \definedummyword\bullet |
| 4210 \definedummyword\comma |
| 4211 \definedummyword\copyright |
| 4212 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol |
| 4213 \definedummyword\dots |
| 4214 \definedummyword\enddots |
| 4215 \definedummyword\equiv |
| 4216 \definedummyword\error |
| 4217 \definedummyword\euro |
| 4218 \definedummyword\guillemetleft |
| 4219 \definedummyword\guillemetright |
| 4220 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft |
| 4221 \definedummyword\guilsinglright |
| 4222 \definedummyword\expansion |
| 4223 \definedummyword\minus |
| 4224 \definedummyword\ogonek |
| 4225 \definedummyword\pounds |
| 4226 \definedummyword\point |
| 4227 \definedummyword\print |
| 4228 \definedummyword\quotedblbase |
| 4229 \definedummyword\quotedblleft |
| 4230 \definedummyword\quotedblright |
| 4231 \definedummyword\quoteleft |
| 4232 \definedummyword\quoteright |
| 4233 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase |
| 4234 \definedummyword\result |
| 4235 \definedummyword\textdegree |
| 4236 % |
| 4237 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. |
| 4238 \macrolist |
| 4239 % |
| 4240 \normalturnoffactive |
| 4241 % |
| 4242 % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any |
| 4243 % (non-fully-expandable) commands. |
| 4244 \makevalueexpandable |
| 4245 } |
| 4246 |
| 4247 % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. |
| 4248 % |
| 4249 \def\commondummiesnofonts{% |
| 4250 % Control letters and accents. |
| 4251 \definedummyletter\!% |
| 4252 \definedummyaccent\"% |
| 4253 \definedummyaccent\'% |
| 4254 \definedummyletter\*% |
| 4255 \definedummyaccent\,% |
| 4256 \definedummyletter\.% |
| 4257 \definedummyletter\/% |
| 4258 \definedummyletter\:% |
| 4259 \definedummyaccent\=% |
| 4260 \definedummyletter\?% |
| 4261 \definedummyaccent\^% |
| 4262 \definedummyaccent\`% |
| 4263 \definedummyaccent\~% |
| 4264 \definedummyword\u |
| 4265 \definedummyword\v |
| 4266 \definedummyword\H |
| 4267 \definedummyword\dotaccent |
| 4268 \definedummyword\ogonek |
| 4269 \definedummyword\ringaccent |
| 4270 \definedummyword\tieaccent |
| 4271 \definedummyword\ubaraccent |
| 4272 \definedummyword\udotaccent |
| 4273 \definedummyword\dotless |
| 4274 % |
| 4275 % Texinfo font commands. |
| 4276 \definedummyword\b |
| 4277 \definedummyword\i |
| 4278 \definedummyword\r |
| 4279 \definedummyword\sc |
| 4280 \definedummyword\t |
| 4281 % |
| 4282 % Commands that take arguments. |
| 4283 \definedummyword\acronym |
| 4284 \definedummyword\cite |
| 4285 \definedummyword\code |
| 4286 \definedummyword\command |
| 4287 \definedummyword\dfn |
| 4288 \definedummyword\emph |
| 4289 \definedummyword\env |
| 4290 \definedummyword\file |
| 4291 \definedummyword\kbd |
| 4292 \definedummyword\key |
| 4293 \definedummyword\math |
| 4294 \definedummyword\option |
| 4295 \definedummyword\pxref |
| 4296 \definedummyword\ref |
| 4297 \definedummyword\samp |
| 4298 \definedummyword\strong |
| 4299 \definedummyword\tie |
| 4300 \definedummyword\uref |
| 4301 \definedummyword\url |
| 4302 \definedummyword\var |
| 4303 \definedummyword\verb |
| 4304 \definedummyword\w |
| 4305 \definedummyword\xref |
| 4306 } |
| 4307 |
| 4308 % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index |
| 4309 % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all |
| 4310 % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string |
| 4311 % would be for a given command (usually its argument). |
| 4312 % |
| 4313 \def\indexnofonts{% |
| 4314 % Accent commands should become @asis. |
| 4315 \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% |
| 4316 % We can just ignore other control letters. |
| 4317 \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% |
| 4318 % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. |
| 4319 \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent |
| 4320 % |
| 4321 \commondummiesnofonts |
| 4322 % |
| 4323 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command |
| 4324 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. |
| 4325 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. |
| 4326 %\let\tt=\asis |
| 4327 % |
| 4328 \def\ { }% |
| 4329 \def\@{@}% |
| 4330 % how to handle braces? |
| 4331 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% |
| 4332 % |
| 4333 % Non-English letters. |
| 4334 \def\AA{AA}% |
| 4335 \def\AE{AE}% |
| 4336 \def\L{L}% |
| 4337 \def\OE{OE}% |
| 4338 \def\O{O}% |
| 4339 \def\aa{aa}% |
| 4340 \def\ae{ae}% |
| 4341 \def\l{l}% |
| 4342 \def\oe{oe}% |
| 4343 \def\o{o}% |
| 4344 \def\ss{ss}% |
| 4345 \def\exclamdown{!}% |
| 4346 \def\questiondown{?}% |
| 4347 \def\ordf{a}% |
| 4348 \def\ordm{o}% |
| 4349 % |
| 4350 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% |
| 4351 \def\TeX{TeX}% |
| 4352 % |
| 4353 % Assorted special characters. |
| 4354 % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) |
| 4355 \def\bullet{bullet}% |
| 4356 \def\comma{,}% |
| 4357 \def\copyright{copyright}% |
| 4358 \def\registeredsymbol{R}% |
| 4359 \def\dots{...}% |
| 4360 \def\enddots{...}% |
| 4361 \def\equiv{==}% |
| 4362 \def\error{error}% |
| 4363 \def\euro{euro}% |
| 4364 \def\guillemetleft{<<}% |
| 4365 \def\guillemetright{>>}% |
| 4366 \def\guilsinglleft{<}% |
| 4367 \def\guilsinglright{>}% |
| 4368 \def\expansion{==>}% |
| 4369 \def\minus{-}% |
| 4370 \def\pounds{pounds}% |
| 4371 \def\point{.}% |
| 4372 \def\print{-|}% |
| 4373 \def\quotedblbase{"}% |
| 4374 \def\quotedblleft{"}% |
| 4375 \def\quotedblright{"}% |
| 4376 \def\quoteleft{`}% |
| 4377 \def\quoteright{'}% |
| 4378 \def\quotesinglbase{,}% |
| 4379 \def\result{=>}% |
| 4380 \def\textdegree{degrees}% |
| 4381 % |
| 4382 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). |
| 4383 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. |
| 4384 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up |
| 4385 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry |
| 4386 % that starts with \. |
| 4387 % |
| 4388 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them |
| 4389 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that |
| 4390 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. |
| 4391 % |
| 4392 \macrolist |
| 4393 } |
| 4394 |
| 4395 \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. |
| 4396 \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? |
| 4397 |
| 4398 % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. |
| 4399 % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. |
| 4400 \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} |
| 4401 |
| 4402 % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. |
| 4403 % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- |
| 4404 % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception |
| 4405 % is with most defuns, which call us directly). |
| 4406 % |
| 4407 \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% |
| 4408 \iflinks |
| 4409 {% |
| 4410 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). |
| 4411 \toks0 = {#2}% |
| 4412 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. |
| 4413 \def\thirdarg{#3}% |
| 4414 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else |
| 4415 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% |
| 4416 \fi |
| 4417 % |
| 4418 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% |
| 4419 % |
| 4420 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite |
| 4421 }% |
| 4422 \fi |
| 4423 } |
| 4424 |
| 4425 % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: |
| 4426 % |
| 4427 \def\dosubindwrite{% |
| 4428 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
| 4429 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else |
| 4430 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% |
| 4431 \fi |
| 4432 % |
| 4433 % Remember, we are within a group. |
| 4434 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
| 4435 \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now |
| 4436 % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. |
| 4437 % |
| 4438 % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to |
| 4439 % get the string to sort by. |
| 4440 {\indexnofonts |
| 4441 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion |
| 4442 \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% |
| 4443 }% |
| 4444 % |
| 4445 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and |
| 4446 % the original text, including any font commands. We write |
| 4447 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the |
| 4448 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s |
| 4449 % sorted result. |
| 4450 \edef\temp{% |
| 4451 \write\writeto{% |
| 4452 \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% |
| 4453 }% |
| 4454 \temp |
| 4455 } |
| 4456 |
| 4457 % Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: |
| 4458 % |
| 4459 % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it |
| 4460 % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting |
| 4461 % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the |
| 4462 % \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that |
| 4463 % sequences like this: |
| 4464 % @end defun |
| 4465 % @tindex whatever |
| 4466 % @defun ... |
| 4467 % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the |
| 4468 % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of |
| 4469 % the previous defun. |
| 4470 % |
| 4471 % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We |
| 4472 % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. |
| 4473 % |
| 4474 % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. |
| 4475 % |
| 4476 % But wait, there is a catch there: |
| 4477 % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not |
| 4478 % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts |
| 4479 % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual |
| 4480 % representation of the skip. |
| 4481 % |
| 4482 % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that |
| 4483 % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). |
| 4484 % |
| 4485 \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} |
| 4486 % |
| 4487 \newskip\whatsitskip |
| 4488 \newcount\whatsitpenalty |
| 4489 % |
| 4490 % ..., ready, GO: |
| 4491 % |
| 4492 \def\safewhatsit#1{% |
| 4493 \ifhmode |
| 4494 #1% |
| 4495 \else |
| 4496 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. |
| 4497 \whatsitskip = \lastskip |
| 4498 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% |
| 4499 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty |
| 4500 % |
| 4501 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a |
| 4502 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this |
| 4503 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a |
| 4504 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential |
| 4505 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. |
| 4506 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro |
| 4507 \else |
| 4508 \vskip-\whatsitskip |
| 4509 \fi |
| 4510 % |
| 4511 #1% |
| 4512 % |
| 4513 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro |
| 4514 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and |
| 4515 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want |
| 4516 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various |
| 4517 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any |
| 4518 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: |
| 4519 % |
| 4520 % @deffn deffn-whatever |
| 4521 % @vindex index-whatever |
| 4522 % Description. |
| 4523 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit |
| 4524 % and the "Description." paragraph. |
| 4525 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi |
| 4526 \else |
| 4527 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, |
| 4528 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item |
| 4529 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. |
| 4530 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip |
| 4531 \fi |
| 4532 \fi |
| 4533 } |
| 4534 |
| 4535 % The index entry written in the file actually looks like |
| 4536 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} |
| 4537 % or |
| 4538 % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} |
| 4539 % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files |
| 4540 % containing these kinds of lines: |
| 4541 % \initial {c} |
| 4542 % before the first topic whose initial is c |
| 4543 % \entry {topic}{pagelist} |
| 4544 % for a topic that is used without subtopics |
| 4545 % \primary {topic} |
| 4546 % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics |
| 4547 % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} |
| 4548 % for each subtopic. |
| 4549 |
| 4550 % Define the user-accessible indexing commands |
| 4551 % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. |
| 4552 |
| 4553 \def\findex {\fnindex} |
| 4554 \def\kindex {\kyindex} |
| 4555 \def\cindex {\cpindex} |
| 4556 \def\vindex {\vrindex} |
| 4557 \def\tindex {\tpindex} |
| 4558 \def\pindex {\pgindex} |
| 4559 |
| 4560 \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} |
| 4561 {\obeylines % |
| 4562 \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % |
| 4563 \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} |
| 4564 |
| 4565 % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. |
| 4566 |
| 4567 % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. |
| 4568 % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). |
| 4569 % |
| 4570 \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup |
| 4571 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
| 4572 % |
| 4573 \smallfonts \rm |
| 4574 \tolerance = 9500 |
| 4575 \plainfrenchspacing |
| 4576 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. |
| 4577 % |
| 4578 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. |
| 4579 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains |
| 4580 % \initial {@} |
| 4581 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces |
| 4582 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). |
| 4583 \catcode`\@ = 11 |
| 4584 \openin 1 \jobname.#1s |
| 4585 \ifeof 1 |
| 4586 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, |
| 4587 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the |
| 4588 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure |
| 4589 % there is some text. |
| 4590 \putwordIndexNonexistent |
| 4591 \else |
| 4592 % |
| 4593 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof |
| 4594 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so |
| 4595 % it can discover if there is anything in it. |
| 4596 \read 1 to \temp |
| 4597 \ifeof 1 |
| 4598 \putwordIndexIsEmpty |
| 4599 \else |
| 4600 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape |
| 4601 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change |
| 4602 % to make right now. |
| 4603 \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% |
| 4604 \catcode`\\ = 0 |
| 4605 \escapechar = `\\ |
| 4606 \begindoublecolumns |
| 4607 \input \jobname.#1s |
| 4608 \enddoublecolumns |
| 4609 \fi |
| 4610 \fi |
| 4611 \closein 1 |
| 4612 \endgroup} |
| 4613 |
| 4614 % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. |
| 4615 % Change them to control the appearance of the index. |
| 4616 |
| 4617 \def\initial#1{{% |
| 4618 % Some minor font changes for the special characters. |
| 4619 \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt |
| 4620 % |
| 4621 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. |
| 4622 \removelastskip |
| 4623 % |
| 4624 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. |
| 4625 \nobreak |
| 4626 \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip |
| 4627 \penalty 0 |
| 4628 \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip |
| 4629 % |
| 4630 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of |
| 4631 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column |
| 4632 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch |
| 4633 % we need before each entry, but it's better. |
| 4634 % |
| 4635 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. |
| 4636 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip |
| 4637 \leftline{\secbf #1}% |
| 4638 % Do our best not to break after the initial. |
| 4639 \nobreak |
| 4640 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip |
| 4641 }} |
| 4642 |
| 4643 % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and |
| 4644 % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index |
| 4645 % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. |
| 4646 % |
| 4647 % A straightforward implementation would start like this: |
| 4648 % \def\entry#1#2{... |
| 4649 % But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to |
| 4650 % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- |
| 4651 % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. |
| 4652 % |
| 4653 % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. |
| 4654 % --kasal, 21nov03 |
| 4655 \def\entry{% |
| 4656 \begingroup |
| 4657 % |
| 4658 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't |
| 4659 % affect previous text. |
| 4660 \par |
| 4661 % |
| 4662 % Do not fill out the last line with white space. |
| 4663 \parfillskip = 0in |
| 4664 % |
| 4665 % No extra space above this paragraph. |
| 4666 \parskip = 0in |
| 4667 % |
| 4668 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. |
| 4669 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 |
| 4670 % |
| 4671 % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number |
| 4672 % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the |
| 4673 % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large |
| 4674 % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across |
| 4675 % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. |
| 4676 % |
| 4677 % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start |
| 4678 % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. |
| 4679 \hangindent = 2em |
| 4680 % |
| 4681 % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line |
| 4682 % with blank space. |
| 4683 \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil |
| 4684 % |
| 4685 % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing |
| 4686 % columns. |
| 4687 \vskip 0pt plus1pt |
| 4688 % |
| 4689 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): |
| 4690 \afterassignment\doentry |
| 4691 \let\temp = |
| 4692 } |
| 4693 \def\doentry{% |
| 4694 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. |
| 4695 \noindent |
| 4696 \aftergroup\finishentry |
| 4697 % And now comes the text of the entry. |
| 4698 } |
| 4699 \def\finishentry#1{% |
| 4700 % #1 is the page number. |
| 4701 % |
| 4702 % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if |
| 4703 % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be |
| 4704 % cursed by a Unix daemon. |
| 4705 \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}% |
| 4706 \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt |
| 4707 \ % |
| 4708 \else |
| 4709 % |
| 4710 % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out |
| 4711 % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the |
| 4712 % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) |
| 4713 \hfil\penalty50 |
| 4714 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. |
| 4715 % |
| 4716 % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as |
| 4717 % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull |
| 4718 % \hbox ensues. |
| 4719 \ifpdf |
| 4720 \pdfgettoks#1.% |
| 4721 \ \the\toksA |
| 4722 \else |
| 4723 \ #1% |
| 4724 \fi |
| 4725 \fi |
| 4726 \par |
| 4727 \endgroup |
| 4728 } |
| 4729 |
| 4730 % Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. |
| 4731 \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders |
| 4732 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} |
| 4733 |
| 4734 \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} |
| 4735 |
| 4736 \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm |
| 4737 \def\secondary#1#2{{% |
| 4738 \parfillskip=0in |
| 4739 \parskip=0in |
| 4740 \hangindent=1in |
| 4741 \hangafter=1 |
| 4742 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill |
| 4743 \ifpdf |
| 4744 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. |
| 4745 \else |
| 4746 #2 |
| 4747 \fi |
| 4748 \par |
| 4749 }} |
| 4750 |
| 4751 % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. |
| 4752 % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, |
| 4753 % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. |
| 4754 \catcode`\@=11 |
| 4755 |
| 4756 \newbox\partialpage |
| 4757 \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize |
| 4758 |
| 4759 \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns |
| 4760 % Grab any single-column material above us. |
| 4761 \output = {% |
| 4762 % |
| 4763 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a |
| 4764 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output |
| 4765 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is |
| 4766 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In |
| 4767 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal |
| 4768 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this |
| 4769 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. |
| 4770 \ifvoid\partialpage \else |
| 4771 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% |
| 4772 \fi |
| 4773 % |
| 4774 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% |
| 4775 % Unvbox the main output page. |
| 4776 \unvbox\PAGE |
| 4777 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip |
| 4778 }% |
| 4779 }% |
| 4780 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage |
| 4781 % |
| 4782 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. |
| 4783 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% |
| 4784 % |
| 4785 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this |
| 4786 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 |
| 4787 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple |
| 4788 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the |
| 4789 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. |
| 4790 % |
| 4791 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between |
| 4792 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it |
| 4793 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant |
| 4794 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) |
| 4795 % as it did when we hard-coded it. |
| 4796 % |
| 4797 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we |
| 4798 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) |
| 4799 % been clobbered. |
| 4800 % |
| 4801 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize |
| 4802 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize |
| 4803 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 |
| 4804 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize |
| 4805 % |
| 4806 % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, |
| 4807 % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) |
| 4808 \vsize = 2\vsize |
| 4809 } |
| 4810 |
| 4811 % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except |
| 4812 % the last. |
| 4813 % |
| 4814 \def\doublecolumnout{% |
| 4815 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
| 4816 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal |
| 4817 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the |
| 4818 % previous page. |
| 4819 \dimen@ = \vsize |
| 4820 \divide\dimen@ by 2 |
| 4821 \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage |
| 4822 % |
| 4823 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. |
| 4824 \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ |
| 4825 \onepageout\pagesofar |
| 4826 \unvbox255 |
| 4827 \penalty\outputpenalty |
| 4828 } |
| 4829 % |
| 4830 % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, |
| 4831 % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. |
| 4832 \def\pagesofar{% |
| 4833 \unvbox\partialpage |
| 4834 % |
| 4835 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize |
| 4836 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize |
| 4837 \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% |
| 4838 } |
| 4839 % |
| 4840 % All done with double columns. |
| 4841 \def\enddoublecolumns{% |
| 4842 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised |
| 4843 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the |
| 4844 % following situation: |
| 4845 % |
| 4846 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. |
| 4847 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no |
| 4848 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last |
| 4849 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not |
| 4850 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following |
| 4851 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject |
| 4852 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output |
| 4853 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last |
| 4854 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which |
| 4855 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with |
| 4856 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as |
| 4857 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page |
| 4858 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the |
| 4859 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page |
| 4860 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final |
| 4861 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after |
| 4862 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns |
| 4863 % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see |
| 4864 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. |
| 4865 % |
| 4866 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the |
| 4867 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). |
| 4868 \penalty0 |
| 4869 % |
| 4870 \output = {% |
| 4871 % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the |
| 4872 % current page, no automatic page break. |
| 4873 \balancecolumns |
| 4874 % |
| 4875 % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, |
| 4876 % though, there will be another page break right after this \output |
| 4877 % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not |
| 4878 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal |
| 4879 % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be |
| 4880 % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes |
| 4881 % the output somewhat more palatable.) |
| 4882 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% |
| 4883 }% |
| 4884 \eject |
| 4885 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns |
| 4886 % |
| 4887 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted |
| 4888 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column |
| 4889 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the |
| 4890 % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). |
| 4891 \pagegoal = \vsize |
| 4892 } |
| 4893 % |
| 4894 % Called at the end of the double column material. |
| 4895 \def\balancecolumns{% |
| 4896 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. |
| 4897 \dimen@ = \ht0 |
| 4898 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip |
| 4899 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip |
| 4900 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to |
| 4901 %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% |
| 4902 \splittopskip = \topskip |
| 4903 % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. |
| 4904 {% |
| 4905 \vbadness = 10000 |
| 4906 \loop |
| 4907 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 |
| 4908 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ |
| 4909 \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ |
| 4910 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt |
| 4911 \repeat |
| 4912 }% |
| 4913 %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% |
| 4914 \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% |
| 4915 \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% |
| 4916 % |
| 4917 \pagesofar |
| 4918 } |
| 4919 \catcode`\@ = \other |
| 4920 |
| 4921 |
| 4922 \message{sectioning,} |
| 4923 % Chapters, sections, etc. |
| 4924 |
| 4925 % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered |
| 4926 % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf |
| 4927 % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter |
| 4928 % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 |
| 4929 % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) |
| 4930 \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 |
| 4931 \newcount\chapno |
| 4932 \newcount\secno \secno=0 |
| 4933 \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 |
| 4934 \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 |
| 4935 |
| 4936 % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... |
| 4937 \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ |
| 4938 % |
| 4939 % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
| 4940 % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple |
| 4941 % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual |
| 4942 % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. |
| 4943 % |
| 4944 \def\appendixletter{% |
| 4945 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% |
| 4946 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% |
| 4947 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% |
| 4948 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% |
| 4949 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% |
| 4950 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% |
| 4951 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% |
| 4952 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% |
| 4953 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% |
| 4954 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% |
| 4955 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% |
| 4956 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% |
| 4957 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% |
| 4958 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% |
| 4959 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% |
| 4960 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% |
| 4961 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% |
| 4962 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% |
| 4963 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% |
| 4964 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% |
| 4965 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% |
| 4966 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% |
| 4967 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% |
| 4968 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% |
| 4969 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% |
| 4970 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% |
| 4971 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is |
| 4972 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not |
| 4973 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out |
| 4974 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. |
| 4975 \else\char\the\appendixno |
| 4976 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
| 4977 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
| 4978 |
| 4979 % Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number |
| 4980 % and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use |
| 4981 % these. @section does likewise. |
| 4982 \def\thischapter{} |
| 4983 \def\thischapternum{} |
| 4984 \def\thischaptername{} |
| 4985 \def\thissection{} |
| 4986 \def\thissectionnum{} |
| 4987 \def\thissectionname{} |
| 4988 |
| 4989 \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level |
| 4990 \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count |
| 4991 |
| 4992 % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. |
| 4993 \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} |
| 4994 \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name |
| 4995 |
| 4996 % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. |
| 4997 \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} |
| 4998 \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name |
| 4999 |
| 5000 % we only have subsub. |
| 5001 \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 |
| 5002 % |
| 5003 % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. |
| 5004 % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: |
| 5005 \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel |
| 5006 % |
| 5007 % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: |
| 5008 % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. |
| 5009 \def\chapheadtype{N} |
| 5010 |
| 5011 % Choose a heading macro |
| 5012 % #1 is heading type |
| 5013 % #2 is heading level |
| 5014 % #3 is text for heading |
| 5015 \def\genhead#1#2#3{% |
| 5016 % Compute the abs. sec. level: |
| 5017 \absseclevel=#2 |
| 5018 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase |
| 5019 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: |
| 5020 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 |
| 5021 \absseclevel = 0 |
| 5022 \else |
| 5023 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 |
| 5024 \absseclevel = 3 |
| 5025 \fi |
| 5026 \fi |
| 5027 % The heading type: |
| 5028 \def\headtype{#1}% |
| 5029 \if \headtype U% |
| 5030 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel |
| 5031 \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel |
| 5032 \fi |
| 5033 \else |
| 5034 % Check for appendix sections: |
| 5035 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 |
| 5036 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% |
| 5037 \else |
| 5038 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% |
| 5039 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% |
| 5040 \fi\fi |
| 5041 \fi |
| 5042 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: |
| 5043 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel |
| 5044 \def\headtype{U}% |
| 5045 \else |
| 5046 \chardef\unmlevel = 3 |
| 5047 \fi |
| 5048 \fi |
| 5049 % Now print the heading: |
| 5050 \if \headtype U% |
| 5051 \ifcase\absseclevel |
| 5052 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% |
| 5053 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% |
| 5054 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% |
| 5055 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% |
| 5056 \fi |
| 5057 \else |
| 5058 \if \headtype A% |
| 5059 \ifcase\absseclevel |
| 5060 \appendixzzz{#3}% |
| 5061 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% |
| 5062 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% |
| 5063 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% |
| 5064 \fi |
| 5065 \else |
| 5066 \ifcase\absseclevel |
| 5067 \chapterzzz{#3}% |
| 5068 \or \seczzz{#3}% |
| 5069 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% |
| 5070 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% |
| 5071 \fi |
| 5072 \fi |
| 5073 \fi |
| 5074 \suppressfirstparagraphindent |
| 5075 } |
| 5076 |
| 5077 % an interface: |
| 5078 \def\numhead{\genhead N} |
| 5079 \def\apphead{\genhead A} |
| 5080 \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} |
| 5081 |
| 5082 % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset |
| 5083 % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. |
| 5084 % |
| 5085 % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers |
| 5086 % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. |
| 5087 \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty |
| 5088 % |
| 5089 \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz |
| 5090 \def\chapterzzz#1{% |
| 5091 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such |
| 5092 % as an @include file. |
| 5093 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 |
| 5094 \global\advance\chapno by 1 |
| 5095 % |
| 5096 % Used for \float. |
| 5097 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% |
| 5098 \resetallfloatnos |
| 5099 % |
| 5100 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% |
| 5101 % |
| 5102 % Write the actual heading. |
| 5103 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% |
| 5104 % |
| 5105 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. |
| 5106 \global\let\section = \numberedsec |
| 5107 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
| 5108 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
| 5109 } |
| 5110 |
| 5111 \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz |
| 5112 \def\appendixzzz#1{% |
| 5113 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 |
| 5114 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 |
| 5115 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% |
| 5116 \resetallfloatnos |
| 5117 % |
| 5118 \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% |
| 5119 \message{\appendixnum}% |
| 5120 % |
| 5121 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% |
| 5122 % |
| 5123 \global\let\section = \appendixsec |
| 5124 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec |
| 5125 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec |
| 5126 } |
| 5127 |
| 5128 \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumbe
redzzz |
| 5129 \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% |
| 5130 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 |
| 5131 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 |
| 5132 % |
| 5133 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. |
| 5134 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty |
| 5135 \resetallfloatnos |
| 5136 % |
| 5137 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the |
| 5138 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX |
| 5139 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX |
| 5140 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant |
| 5141 % to be executed, not expanded). |
| 5142 % |
| 5143 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear |
| 5144 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use |
| 5145 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, |
| 5146 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for |
| 5147 % the toc entries.) |
| 5148 \toks0 = {#1}% |
| 5149 \message{(\the\toks0)}% |
| 5150 % |
| 5151 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% |
| 5152 % |
| 5153 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec |
| 5154 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec |
| 5155 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec |
| 5156 } |
| 5157 |
| 5158 % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. |
| 5159 \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% |
| 5160 % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break |
| 5161 % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. |
| 5162 % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 |
| 5163 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters |
| 5164 \unnmhead0{#1}% |
| 5165 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax |
| 5166 } |
| 5167 |
| 5168 % @top is like @unnumbered. |
| 5169 \let\top\unnumbered |
| 5170 |
| 5171 % Sections. |
| 5172 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
| 5173 \def\seczzz#1{% |
| 5174 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 |
| 5175 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% |
| 5176 } |
| 5177 |
| 5178 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsecti
onzzz |
| 5179 \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% |
| 5180 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 |
| 5181 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% |
| 5182 } |
| 5183 \let\appendixsec\appendixsection |
| 5184 |
| 5185 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedsecz
zz |
| 5186 \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% |
| 5187 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 |
| 5188 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% |
| 5189 } |
| 5190 |
| 5191 % Subsections. |
| 5192 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubsec
zzz |
| 5193 \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% |
| 5194 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 |
| 5195 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% |
| 5196 } |
| 5197 |
| 5198 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubsec
zzz |
| 5199 \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% |
| 5200 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 |
| 5201 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% |
| 5202 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% |
| 5203 } |
| 5204 |
| 5205 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsu
bseczzz |
| 5206 \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% |
| 5207 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 |
| 5208 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% |
| 5209 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% |
| 5210 } |
| 5211 |
| 5212 % Subsubsections. |
| 5213 \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubsec
zzz |
| 5214 \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% |
| 5215 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 |
| 5216 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% |
| 5217 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% |
| 5218 } |
| 5219 |
| 5220 \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubsec
zzz |
| 5221 \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% |
| 5222 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 |
| 5223 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% |
| 5224 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% |
| 5225 } |
| 5226 |
| 5227 \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsu
bseczzz |
| 5228 \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% |
| 5229 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 |
| 5230 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% |
| 5231 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% |
| 5232 } |
| 5233 |
| 5234 % These macros control what the section commands do, according |
| 5235 % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). |
| 5236 % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. |
| 5237 \let\section = \numberedsec |
| 5238 \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
| 5239 \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
| 5240 |
| 5241 % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading |
| 5242 |
| 5243 % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: |
| 5244 % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit |
| 5245 % overlong headings to fold. |
| 5246 % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a |
| 5247 % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. |
| 5248 % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and |
| 5249 % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. |
| 5250 |
| 5251 \def\majorheading{% |
| 5252 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% |
| 5253 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz |
| 5254 } |
| 5255 |
| 5256 \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} |
| 5257 \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% |
| 5258 {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 5259 \parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 5260 \rmisbold #1\hfill}}% |
| 5261 \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax |
| 5262 \suppressfirstparagraphindent |
| 5263 } |
| 5264 |
| 5265 % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. |
| 5266 \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
| 5267 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} |
| 5268 \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
| 5269 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} |
| 5270 \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
| 5271 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} |
| 5272 |
| 5273 % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only |
| 5274 % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), |
| 5275 % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. |
| 5276 |
| 5277 %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) |
| 5278 \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} |
| 5279 |
| 5280 %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it |
| 5281 % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) |
| 5282 |
| 5283 \newskip\chapheadingskip |
| 5284 |
| 5285 \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} |
| 5286 \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} |
| 5287 % Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will |
| 5288 % get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't |
| 5289 % care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. |
| 5290 \def\chapoddpage{% |
| 5291 \chappager |
| 5292 \ifodd\pageno \else |
| 5293 \begingroup |
| 5294 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% |
| 5295 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% |
| 5296 \hbox to 0pt{}% |
| 5297 \chappager |
| 5298 \endgroup |
| 5299 \fi |
| 5300 } |
| 5301 |
| 5302 \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} |
| 5303 |
| 5304 \def\CHAPPAGoff{% |
| 5305 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
| 5306 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak |
| 5307 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} |
| 5308 |
| 5309 \def\CHAPPAGon{% |
| 5310 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
| 5311 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager |
| 5312 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager |
| 5313 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} |
| 5314 |
| 5315 \def\CHAPPAGodd{% |
| 5316 \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
| 5317 \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage |
| 5318 \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage |
| 5319 \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} |
| 5320 |
| 5321 \CHAPPAGon |
| 5322 |
| 5323 % Chapter opening. |
| 5324 % |
| 5325 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, |
| 5326 % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. |
| 5327 % |
| 5328 % To test against our argument. |
| 5329 \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} |
| 5330 \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} |
| 5331 \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} |
| 5332 % |
| 5333 \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% |
| 5334 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). |
| 5335 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs |
| 5336 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
| 5337 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% |
| 5338 \gdef\thissection{}}% |
| 5339 % |
| 5340 \def\temptype{#2}% |
| 5341 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
| 5342 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% |
| 5343 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% |
| 5344 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
| 5345 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% |
| 5346 \gdef\thischapter{}}% |
| 5347 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
| 5348 \toks0={#1}% |
| 5349 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% |
| 5350 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% |
| 5351 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% |
| 5352 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum: |
| 5353 \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
| 5354 }% |
| 5355 \else |
| 5356 \toks0={#1}% |
| 5357 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% |
| 5358 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% |
| 5359 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% |
| 5360 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum: |
| 5361 \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
| 5362 }% |
| 5363 \fi\fi\fi |
| 5364 % |
| 5365 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of |
| 5366 % the preceding space. |
| 5367 \safewhatsit\domark |
| 5368 % |
| 5369 % Insert the chapter heading break. |
| 5370 \pchapsepmacro |
| 5371 % |
| 5372 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points |
| 5373 % between here and the heading. |
| 5374 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs |
| 5375 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
| 5376 \domark |
| 5377 % |
| 5378 {% |
| 5379 \chapfonts \rmisbold |
| 5380 % |
| 5381 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the |
| 5382 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called |
| 5383 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. |
| 5384 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
| 5385 % |
| 5386 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix |
| 5387 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. |
| 5388 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
| 5389 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% |
| 5390 \def\toctype{unnchap}% |
| 5391 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
| 5392 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry |
| 5393 \def\toctype{omit}% |
| 5394 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
| 5395 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% |
| 5396 \def\toctype{app}% |
| 5397 \else |
| 5398 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% |
| 5399 \def\toctype{numchap}% |
| 5400 \fi\fi\fi |
| 5401 % |
| 5402 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the |
| 5403 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc |
| 5404 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. |
| 5405 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% |
| 5406 % |
| 5407 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make |
| 5408 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has |
| 5409 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the |
| 5410 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not |
| 5411 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. |
| 5412 \donoderef{#2}% |
| 5413 % |
| 5414 % Typeset the actual heading. |
| 5415 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. |
| 5416 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
| 5417 \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe |
| 5418 \unhbox0 #1\par}% |
| 5419 }% |
| 5420 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title |
| 5421 \nobreak |
| 5422 } |
| 5423 |
| 5424 % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. |
| 5425 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax |
| 5426 \def\centerparameters{% |
| 5427 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip |
| 5428 \leftskip = \rightskip |
| 5429 \parfillskip = 0pt |
| 5430 } |
| 5431 |
| 5432 |
| 5433 % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not |
| 5434 % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. |
| 5435 % |
| 5436 \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} |
| 5437 % |
| 5438 \def\unnchfopen #1{% |
| 5439 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 5440 \parindent=0pt\raggedright |
| 5441 \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
| 5442 } |
| 5443 \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts |
| 5444 \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% |
| 5445 \par\penalty 5000 % |
| 5446 } |
| 5447 \def\centerchfopen #1{% |
| 5448 \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
| 5449 \parindent=0pt |
| 5450 \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
| 5451 } |
| 5452 \def\CHAPFopen{% |
| 5453 \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen |
| 5454 \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} |
| 5455 |
| 5456 |
| 5457 % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and |
| 5458 % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. |
| 5459 % |
| 5460 \newskip\secheadingskip |
| 5461 \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} |
| 5462 |
| 5463 % Subsection titles. |
| 5464 \newskip\subsecheadingskip |
| 5465 \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} |
| 5466 |
| 5467 % Subsubsection titles. |
| 5468 \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} |
| 5469 \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} |
| 5470 |
| 5471 |
| 5472 % Print any size, any type, section title. |
| 5473 % |
| 5474 % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is |
| 5475 % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the |
| 5476 % section number. |
| 5477 % |
| 5478 \def\seckeyword{sec} |
| 5479 % |
| 5480 \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% |
| 5481 {% |
| 5482 % Switch to the right set of fonts. |
| 5483 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold |
| 5484 % |
| 5485 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% |
| 5486 \def\temptype{#3}% |
| 5487 % |
| 5488 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). |
| 5489 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
| 5490 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
| 5491 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
| 5492 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% |
| 5493 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% |
| 5494 \fi |
| 5495 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
| 5496 % Don't redefine \thissection. |
| 5497 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
| 5498 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
| 5499 \toks0={#1}% |
| 5500 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% |
| 5501 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% |
| 5502 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% |
| 5503 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: |
| 5504 \noexpand\thissectionname}% |
| 5505 }% |
| 5506 \fi |
| 5507 \else |
| 5508 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword |
| 5509 \toks0={#1}% |
| 5510 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% |
| 5511 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% |
| 5512 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% |
| 5513 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum: |
| 5514 \noexpand\thissectionname}% |
| 5515 }% |
| 5516 \fi |
| 5517 \fi\fi\fi |
| 5518 % |
| 5519 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of |
| 5520 % the preceding space. |
| 5521 \safewhatsit\domark |
| 5522 % |
| 5523 % Insert space above the heading. |
| 5524 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname |
| 5525 % |
| 5526 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points |
| 5527 % between here and the heading. |
| 5528 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs |
| 5529 \domark |
| 5530 % |
| 5531 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. |
| 5532 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword |
| 5533 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% |
| 5534 \def\toctype{unn}% |
| 5535 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
| 5536 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
| 5537 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, |
| 5538 % and don't redefine \lastsection. |
| 5539 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% |
| 5540 \def\toctype{omit}% |
| 5541 \let\sectionlevel=\empty |
| 5542 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
| 5543 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% |
| 5544 \def\toctype{app}% |
| 5545 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
| 5546 \else |
| 5547 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% |
| 5548 \def\toctype{num}% |
| 5549 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% |
| 5550 \fi\fi\fi |
| 5551 % |
| 5552 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. |
| 5553 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% |
| 5554 % |
| 5555 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). |
| 5556 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. |
| 5557 \donoderef{#3}% |
| 5558 % |
| 5559 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. |
| 5560 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be |
| 5561 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the |
| 5562 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that |
| 5563 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the |
| 5564 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. |
| 5565 \nobreak |
| 5566 % |
| 5567 % Output the actual section heading. |
| 5568 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
| 5569 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number |
| 5570 \unhbox0 #1}% |
| 5571 }% |
| 5572 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. |
| 5573 % Don't allow stretch, though. |
| 5574 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname |
| 5575 % |
| 5576 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it |
| 5577 % was followed by glue. |
| 5578 \nobreak |
| 5579 % |
| 5580 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that |
| 5581 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a |
| 5582 % discardable item.) |
| 5583 \vskip-\parskip |
| 5584 % |
| 5585 % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > |
| 5586 % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after |
| 5587 % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: |
| 5588 % |
| 5589 % @section sec-whatever |
| 5590 % @deffn def-whatever |
| 5591 \penalty 10001 |
| 5592 } |
| 5593 |
| 5594 |
| 5595 \message{toc,} |
| 5596 % Table of contents. |
| 5597 \newwrite\tocfile |
| 5598 |
| 5599 % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. |
| 5600 % Called from @chapter, etc. |
| 5601 % |
| 5602 % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} |
| 5603 % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional |
| 5604 % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually |
| 5605 % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the |
| 5606 % destination to jump to. |
| 5607 % |
| 5608 % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or |
| 5609 % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. |
| 5610 % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the |
| 5611 % table of contents chapter openings themselves. |
| 5612 % |
| 5613 \newif\iftocfileopened |
| 5614 \def\omitkeyword{omit}% |
| 5615 % |
| 5616 \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% |
| 5617 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% |
| 5618 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else |
| 5619 \iftocfileopened\else |
| 5620 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc |
| 5621 \global\tocfileopenedtrue |
| 5622 \fi |
| 5623 % |
| 5624 \iflinks |
| 5625 {\atdummies |
| 5626 \edef\temp{% |
| 5627 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
| 5628 \temp |
| 5629 }% |
| 5630 \fi |
| 5631 \fi |
| 5632 % |
| 5633 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're |
| 5634 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't |
| 5635 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered |
| 5636 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first |
| 5637 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named |
| 5638 % `1', and two named `2'. |
| 5639 \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi |
| 5640 } |
| 5641 |
| 5642 |
| 5643 % These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman |
| 5644 % fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant |
| 5645 % with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. |
| 5646 % |
| 5647 \def\activecatcodes{% |
| 5648 \catcode`\"=\active |
| 5649 \catcode`\$=\active |
| 5650 \catcode`\<=\active |
| 5651 \catcode`\>=\active |
| 5652 \catcode`\\=\active |
| 5653 \catcode`\^=\active |
| 5654 \catcode`\_=\active |
| 5655 \catcode`\|=\active |
| 5656 \catcode`\~=\active |
| 5657 } |
| 5658 |
| 5659 |
| 5660 % Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. |
| 5661 \def\readtocfile{% |
| 5662 \setupdatafile |
| 5663 \activecatcodes |
| 5664 \input \tocreadfilename |
| 5665 } |
| 5666 |
| 5667 \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in |
| 5668 \newcount\savepageno |
| 5669 \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 |
| 5670 |
| 5671 % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. |
| 5672 % |
| 5673 \def\startcontents#1{% |
| 5674 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
| 5675 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain |
| 5676 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. |
| 5677 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> |
| 5678 \contentsalignmacro |
| 5679 \immediate\closeout\tocfile |
| 5680 % |
| 5681 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. |
| 5682 % It is abundantly clear what they are. |
| 5683 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% |
| 5684 % |
| 5685 \savepageno = \pageno |
| 5686 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. |
| 5687 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. |
| 5688 \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. |
| 5689 % |
| 5690 % Roman numerals for page numbers. |
| 5691 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi |
| 5692 } |
| 5693 |
| 5694 % redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on |
| 5695 % \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. |
| 5696 % |
| 5697 \def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} |
| 5698 |
| 5699 % Normal (long) toc. |
| 5700 % |
| 5701 \def\contents{% |
| 5702 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% |
| 5703 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space |
| 5704 \ifeof 1 \else |
| 5705 \readtocfile |
| 5706 \fi |
| 5707 \vfill \eject |
| 5708 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect |
| 5709 \ifeof 1 \else |
| 5710 \pdfmakeoutlines |
| 5711 \fi |
| 5712 \closein 1 |
| 5713 \endgroup |
| 5714 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno |
| 5715 \global\pageno = \savepageno |
| 5716 } |
| 5717 |
| 5718 % And just the chapters. |
| 5719 \def\summarycontents{% |
| 5720 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% |
| 5721 % |
| 5722 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry |
| 5723 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry |
| 5724 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry |
| 5725 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. |
| 5726 \secfonts |
| 5727 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf |
| 5728 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt |
| 5729 \rm |
| 5730 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 |
| 5731 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. |
| 5732 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} |
| 5733 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry |
| 5734 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry |
| 5735 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
| 5736 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
| 5737 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
| 5738 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
| 5739 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
| 5740 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry |
| 5741 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space |
| 5742 \ifeof 1 \else |
| 5743 \readtocfile |
| 5744 \fi |
| 5745 \closein 1 |
| 5746 \vfill \eject |
| 5747 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect |
| 5748 \endgroup |
| 5749 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno |
| 5750 \global\pageno = \savepageno |
| 5751 } |
| 5752 \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents |
| 5753 |
| 5754 % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
| 5755 % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. |
| 5756 % |
| 5757 \def\shortchaplabel#1{% |
| 5758 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the |
| 5759 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. |
| 5760 % But use \hss just in case. |
| 5761 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after |
| 5762 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) |
| 5763 % |
| 5764 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange |
| 5765 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and |
| 5766 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 |
| 5767 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters |
| 5768 % there are before deciding ... |
| 5769 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% |
| 5770 } |
| 5771 |
| 5772 % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. |
| 5773 % The first argument is the chapter or section name. |
| 5774 % The last argument is the page number. |
| 5775 % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... |
| 5776 |
| 5777 % Chapters, in the main contents. |
| 5778 \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
| 5779 % |
| 5780 % Chapters, in the short toc. |
| 5781 % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. |
| 5782 \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% |
| 5783 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% |
| 5784 } |
| 5785 |
| 5786 % Appendices, in the main contents. |
| 5787 % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. |
| 5788 % |
| 5789 \def\appendixbox#1{% |
| 5790 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. |
| 5791 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% |
| 5792 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} |
| 5793 % |
| 5794 \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
| 5795 |
| 5796 % Unnumbered chapters. |
| 5797 \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} |
| 5798 \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} |
| 5799 |
| 5800 % Sections. |
| 5801 \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
| 5802 \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry |
| 5803 \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} |
| 5804 |
| 5805 % Subsections. |
| 5806 \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
| 5807 \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry |
| 5808 \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} |
| 5809 |
| 5810 % And subsubsections. |
| 5811 \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
| 5812 \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry |
| 5813 \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} |
| 5814 |
| 5815 % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. |
| 5816 % Same as \defaultparindent. |
| 5817 \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt |
| 5818 |
| 5819 % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the |
| 5820 % page number. |
| 5821 % |
| 5822 % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters |
| 5823 % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. |
| 5824 \def\dochapentry#1#2{% |
| 5825 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip |
| 5826 \begingroup |
| 5827 \chapentryfonts |
| 5828 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
| 5829 \endgroup |
| 5830 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip |
| 5831 } |
| 5832 |
| 5833 \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| 5834 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent |
| 5835 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
| 5836 \endgroup} |
| 5837 |
| 5838 \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| 5839 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent |
| 5840 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
| 5841 \endgroup} |
| 5842 |
| 5843 \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
| 5844 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent |
| 5845 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
| 5846 \endgroup} |
| 5847 |
| 5848 % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. |
| 5849 \let\tocentry = \entry |
| 5850 |
| 5851 % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. |
| 5852 \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} |
| 5853 |
| 5854 \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} |
| 5855 \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} |
| 5856 |
| 5857 \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} |
| 5858 \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} |
| 5859 \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} |
| 5860 \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} |
| 5861 |
| 5862 |
| 5863 \message{environments,} |
| 5864 % @foo ... @end foo. |
| 5865 |
| 5866 % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. |
| 5867 % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. |
| 5868 % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. |
| 5869 |
| 5870 \envdef\tex{% |
| 5871 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% |
| 5872 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
| 5873 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 |
| 5874 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie |
| 5875 \catcode `\%=14 |
| 5876 \catcode `\+=\other |
| 5877 \catcode `\"=\other |
| 5878 \catcode `\|=\other |
| 5879 \catcode `\<=\other |
| 5880 \catcode `\>=\other |
| 5881 \catcode`\`=\other |
| 5882 \catcode`\'=\other |
| 5883 \escapechar=`\\ |
| 5884 % |
| 5885 \let\b=\ptexb |
| 5886 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet |
| 5887 \let\c=\ptexc |
| 5888 \let\,=\ptexcomma |
| 5889 \let\.=\ptexdot |
| 5890 \let\dots=\ptexdots |
| 5891 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv |
| 5892 \let\!=\ptexexclam |
| 5893 \let\i=\ptexi |
| 5894 \let\indent=\ptexindent |
| 5895 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent |
| 5896 \let\{=\ptexlbrace |
| 5897 \let\+=\tabalign |
| 5898 \let\}=\ptexrbrace |
| 5899 \let\/=\ptexslash |
| 5900 \let\*=\ptexstar |
| 5901 \let\t=\ptext |
| 5902 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer |
| 5903 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing |
| 5904 % |
| 5905 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% |
| 5906 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% |
| 5907 \def\@{@}% |
| 5908 } |
| 5909 % There is no need to define \Etex. |
| 5910 |
| 5911 % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. |
| 5912 % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, |
| 5913 % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). |
| 5914 |
| 5915 % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. |
| 5916 \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in |
| 5917 |
| 5918 % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other |
| 5919 % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't |
| 5920 % have any width. |
| 5921 \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} |
| 5922 |
| 5923 % This space is always present above and below environments. |
| 5924 \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt |
| 5925 |
| 5926 % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here |
| 5927 % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip |
| 5928 % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the |
| 5929 % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. |
| 5930 % |
| 5931 \def\aboveenvbreak{{% |
| 5932 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and |
| 5933 % \sectionheading, q.v. |
| 5934 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else |
| 5935 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip |
| 5936 \endgraf |
| 5937 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount |
| 5938 \removelastskip |
| 5939 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak |
| 5940 % or better ... |
| 5941 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi |
| 5942 \vskip\envskipamount |
| 5943 \fi |
| 5944 \fi |
| 5945 }} |
| 5946 |
| 5947 \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak |
| 5948 |
| 5949 % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will |
| 5950 % also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. |
| 5951 \let\nonarrowing=\relax |
| 5952 |
| 5953 % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around |
| 5954 % environment contents. |
| 5955 \font\circle=lcircle10 |
| 5956 \newdimen\circthick |
| 5957 \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner |
| 5958 \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip |
| 5959 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle |
| 5960 % |
| 5961 \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth |
| 5962 \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} |
| 5963 \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} |
| 5964 \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} |
| 5965 \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
| 5966 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr |
| 5967 \hskip\rskip}} |
| 5968 \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
| 5969 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr |
| 5970 \hskip\rskip}} |
| 5971 % |
| 5972 \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip |
| 5973 |
| 5974 \envdef\cartouche{% |
| 5975 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. |
| 5976 \startsavinginserts |
| 5977 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip |
| 5978 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. |
| 5979 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip |
| 5980 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip |
| 5981 \cartouter=\hsize |
| 5982 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either |
| 5983 % side, and for 6pt waste from |
| 5984 % each corner char, and rule thickness |
| 5985 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip |
| 5986 % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. |
| 5987 \let\nonarrowing = t% |
| 5988 \vbox\bgroup |
| 5989 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt |
| 5990 \carttop |
| 5991 \hbox\bgroup |
| 5992 \hskip\lskip |
| 5993 \vrule\kern3pt |
| 5994 \vbox\bgroup |
| 5995 \kern3pt |
| 5996 \hsize=\cartinner |
| 5997 \baselineskip=\normbskip |
| 5998 \lineskip=\normlskip |
| 5999 \parskip=\normpskip |
| 6000 \vskip -\parskip |
| 6001 \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. |
| 6002 } |
| 6003 \def\Ecartouche{% |
| 6004 \ifhmode\par\fi |
| 6005 \kern3pt |
| 6006 \egroup |
| 6007 \kern3pt\vrule |
| 6008 \hskip\rskip |
| 6009 \egroup |
| 6010 \cartbot |
| 6011 \egroup |
| 6012 \checkinserts |
| 6013 } |
| 6014 |
| 6015 |
| 6016 % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, |
| 6017 % inside a group. |
| 6018 \def\nonfillstart{% |
| 6019 \aboveenvbreak |
| 6020 \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy |
| 6021 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. |
| 6022 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines |
| 6023 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output |
| 6024 \parskip = 0pt |
| 6025 \parindent = 0pt |
| 6026 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes |
| 6027 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax |
| 6028 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing |
| 6029 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing |
| 6030 \else |
| 6031 \let\nonarrowing = \relax |
| 6032 \fi |
| 6033 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent |
| 6034 } |
| 6035 |
| 6036 % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. |
| 6037 % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. |
| 6038 % This affects the following displayed environments: |
| 6039 % @example, @display, @format, @lisp |
| 6040 % |
| 6041 \def\smallword{small} |
| 6042 \def\nosmallword{nosmall} |
| 6043 \let\SETdispenvsize\relax |
| 6044 \def\setnormaldispenv{% |
| 6045 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword |
| 6046 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank |
| 6047 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but |
| 6048 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient |
| 6049 % to change the fonts afterward. |
| 6050 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi |
| 6051 \smallexamplefonts \rm |
| 6052 \fi |
| 6053 } |
| 6054 \def\setsmalldispenv{% |
| 6055 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword |
| 6056 \else |
| 6057 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi |
| 6058 \smallexamplefonts \rm |
| 6059 \fi |
| 6060 } |
| 6061 |
| 6062 % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. |
| 6063 % Let's do it by one command: |
| 6064 \def\makedispenv #1#2{ |
| 6065 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} |
| 6066 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} |
| 6067 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak |
| 6068 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak |
| 6069 } |
| 6070 |
| 6071 % Define two synonyms: |
| 6072 \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ |
| 6073 \makedispenv{#1}{#3} |
| 6074 \makedispenv{#2}{#3} |
| 6075 } |
| 6076 |
| 6077 % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. |
| 6078 % |
| 6079 % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. |
| 6080 % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. |
| 6081 % |
| 6082 \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% |
| 6083 \nonfillstart |
| 6084 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% |
| 6085 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. |
| 6086 \gobble % eat return |
| 6087 } |
| 6088 % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. |
| 6089 % |
| 6090 \makedispenv {display}{% |
| 6091 \nonfillstart |
| 6092 \gobble |
| 6093 } |
| 6094 |
| 6095 % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. |
| 6096 % |
| 6097 \makedispenv{format}{% |
| 6098 \let\nonarrowing = t% |
| 6099 \nonfillstart |
| 6100 \gobble |
| 6101 } |
| 6102 |
| 6103 % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. |
| 6104 \envdef\flushleft{% |
| 6105 \let\nonarrowing = t% |
| 6106 \nonfillstart |
| 6107 \gobble |
| 6108 } |
| 6109 \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak |
| 6110 |
| 6111 % @flushright. |
| 6112 % |
| 6113 \envdef\flushright{% |
| 6114 \let\nonarrowing = t% |
| 6115 \nonfillstart |
| 6116 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill |
| 6117 \gobble |
| 6118 } |
| 6119 \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak |
| 6120 |
| 6121 |
| 6122 % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) |
| 6123 % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since |
| 6124 % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and |
| 6125 % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. |
| 6126 % |
| 6127 \def\quotationstart{% |
| 6128 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip |
| 6129 \parindent=0pt |
| 6130 % |
| 6131 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. |
| 6132 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax |
| 6133 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing |
| 6134 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing |
| 6135 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing |
| 6136 \else |
| 6137 \let\nonarrowing = \relax |
| 6138 \fi |
| 6139 \parsearg\quotationlabel |
| 6140 } |
| 6141 |
| 6142 \envdef\quotation{% |
| 6143 \setnormaldispenv |
| 6144 \quotationstart |
| 6145 } |
| 6146 |
| 6147 \envdef\smallquotation{% |
| 6148 \setsmalldispenv |
| 6149 \quotationstart |
| 6150 } |
| 6151 \let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation |
| 6152 |
| 6153 % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're |
| 6154 % doing normal filling. |
| 6155 % |
| 6156 \def\Equotation{% |
| 6157 \par |
| 6158 \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else |
| 6159 % indent a bit. |
| 6160 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% |
| 6161 \fi |
| 6162 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% |
| 6163 } |
| 6164 |
| 6165 % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. |
| 6166 \def\quotationlabel#1{% |
| 6167 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 6168 \ifx\temp\empty \else |
| 6169 {\bf #1: }% |
| 6170 \fi |
| 6171 } |
| 6172 |
| 6173 |
| 6174 % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} |
| 6175 % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, |
| 6176 % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: |
| 6177 % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org |
| 6178 % |
| 6179 % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. |
| 6180 % |
| 6181 % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets |
| 6182 % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a |
| 6183 % verbatim line. |
| 6184 \def\dospecials{% |
| 6185 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% |
| 6186 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% |
| 6187 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% |
| 6188 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and |
| 6189 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and |
| 6190 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. |
| 6191 %\do\`\do\'% |
| 6192 } |
| 6193 % |
| 6194 % [Knuth] p. 380 |
| 6195 \def\uncatcodespecials{% |
| 6196 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} |
| 6197 % |
| 6198 % Setup for the @verb command. |
| 6199 % |
| 6200 % Eight spaces for a tab |
| 6201 \begingroup |
| 6202 \catcode`\^^I=\active |
| 6203 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} |
| 6204 \endgroup |
| 6205 % |
| 6206 \def\setupverb{% |
| 6207 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim |
| 6208 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% |
| 6209 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% |
| 6210 \tabeightspaces |
| 6211 % Respect line breaks, |
| 6212 % print special symbols as themselves, and |
| 6213 % make each space count |
| 6214 % must do in this order: |
| 6215 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces |
| 6216 } |
| 6217 |
| 6218 % Setup for the @verbatim environment |
| 6219 % |
| 6220 % Real tab expansion |
| 6221 \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount |
| 6222 % |
| 6223 \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} |
| 6224 % |
| 6225 \begingroup |
| 6226 \catcode`\^^I=\active |
| 6227 \gdef\tabexpand{% |
| 6228 \catcode`\^^I=\active |
| 6229 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup |
| 6230 \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab |
| 6231 \divide\dimen0 by\tabw |
| 6232 \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw |
| 6233 \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw |
| 6234 \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox |
| 6235 }% |
| 6236 } |
| 6237 \endgroup |
| 6238 |
| 6239 % start the verbatim environment. |
| 6240 \def\setupverbatim{% |
| 6241 \let\nonarrowing = t% |
| 6242 \nonfillstart |
| 6243 % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim |
| 6244 \tt |
| 6245 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% |
| 6246 \tabexpand |
| 6247 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% |
| 6248 % Respect line breaks, |
| 6249 % print special symbols as themselves, and |
| 6250 % make each space count |
| 6251 % must do in this order: |
| 6252 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces |
| 6253 \everypar{\starttabbox}% |
| 6254 } |
| 6255 |
| 6256 % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique |
| 6257 % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a |
| 6258 % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: |
| 6259 % |
| 6260 % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} |
| 6261 % |
| 6262 % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} |
| 6263 \begingroup |
| 6264 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other |
| 6265 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] |
| 6266 \endgroup |
| 6267 % |
| 6268 \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} |
| 6269 % |
| 6270 % |
| 6271 % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that |
| 6272 % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: |
| 6273 % |
| 6274 % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} |
| 6275 % |
| 6276 % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, |
| 6277 % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': |
| 6278 % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. |
| 6279 % |
| 6280 % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] |
| 6281 % |
| 6282 \begingroup |
| 6283 \catcode`\ =\active |
| 6284 \obeylines % |
| 6285 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end |
| 6286 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank |
| 6287 % line in the output. |
| 6288 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% |
| 6289 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but |
| 6290 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. |
| 6291 \endgroup |
| 6292 % |
| 6293 \envdef\verbatim{% |
| 6294 \setupverbatim\doverbatim |
| 6295 } |
| 6296 \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak |
| 6297 |
| 6298 |
| 6299 % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. |
| 6300 % |
| 6301 \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} |
| 6302 % |
| 6303 \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% |
| 6304 {% |
| 6305 \makevalueexpandable |
| 6306 \setupverbatim |
| 6307 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. |
| 6308 \input #1 |
| 6309 \afterenvbreak |
| 6310 }% |
| 6311 } |
| 6312 |
| 6313 % @copying ... @end copying. |
| 6314 % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. |
| 6315 % |
| 6316 % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. |
| 6317 % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the |
| 6318 % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done |
| 6319 % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source |
| 6320 % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as |
| 6321 % possible is very desirable. |
| 6322 % |
| 6323 \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} |
| 6324 \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} |
| 6325 % |
| 6326 \def\insertcopying{% |
| 6327 \begingroup |
| 6328 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page |
| 6329 \scanexp\copyingtext |
| 6330 \endgroup |
| 6331 } |
| 6332 |
| 6333 |
| 6334 \message{defuns,} |
| 6335 % @defun etc. |
| 6336 |
| 6337 \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in |
| 6338 \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt |
| 6339 \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt |
| 6340 \newcount\defunpenalty |
| 6341 |
| 6342 % Start the processing of @deffn: |
| 6343 \def\startdefun{% |
| 6344 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 |
| 6345 \medbreak |
| 6346 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the |
| 6347 % following @def command, see below. |
| 6348 \else |
| 6349 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, |
| 6350 % which is there to keep the function description together with its |
| 6351 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a |
| 6352 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted |
| 6353 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning |
| 6354 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow |
| 6355 % a break between a section heading and a defun. |
| 6356 % |
| 6357 % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling |
| 6358 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the |
| 6359 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following |
| 6360 % @def command. |
| 6361 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi |
| 6362 % |
| 6363 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. |
| 6364 % But do insert the glue. |
| 6365 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint |
| 6366 \fi |
| 6367 % |
| 6368 \parindent=0in |
| 6369 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
| 6370 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 6371 } |
| 6372 |
| 6373 \def\dodefunx#1{% |
| 6374 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: |
| 6375 \checkenv#1% |
| 6376 % |
| 6377 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. |
| 6378 % It's not a great place, though. |
| 6379 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi |
| 6380 % |
| 6381 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: |
| 6382 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% |
| 6383 } |
| 6384 \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} |
| 6385 |
| 6386 % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} |
| 6387 % |
| 6388 \def\printdefunline#1#2{% |
| 6389 \begingroup |
| 6390 % call \deffnheader: |
| 6391 #1#2 \endheader |
| 6392 % common ending: |
| 6393 \interlinepenalty = 10000 |
| 6394 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
| 6395 \endgraf |
| 6396 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip |
| 6397 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx |
| 6398 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, |
| 6399 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. |
| 6400 \checkparencounts |
| 6401 \endgroup |
| 6402 } |
| 6403 |
| 6404 \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} |
| 6405 |
| 6406 % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; |
| 6407 % the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. |
| 6408 % |
| 6409 \def\makedefun#1{% |
| 6410 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun |
| 6411 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun |
| 6412 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% |
| 6413 \temp |
| 6414 } |
| 6415 |
| 6416 % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader |
| 6417 % |
| 6418 % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. |
| 6419 % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. |
| 6420 % |
| 6421 \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% |
| 6422 \envdef#1{% |
| 6423 \startdefun |
| 6424 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% |
| 6425 }% |
| 6426 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% |
| 6427 \def#3% |
| 6428 } |
| 6429 |
| 6430 %%% Untyped functions: |
| 6431 |
| 6432 % @deffn category name args |
| 6433 \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} |
| 6434 |
| 6435 % @deffn category class name args |
| 6436 \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} |
| 6437 |
| 6438 % \defopon {category on}class name args |
| 6439 \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } |
| 6440 |
| 6441 % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args |
| 6442 % |
| 6443 \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% |
| 6444 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. |
| 6445 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% |
| 6446 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% |
| 6447 } |
| 6448 |
| 6449 %%% Typed functions: |
| 6450 |
| 6451 % @deftypefn category type name args |
| 6452 \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} |
| 6453 |
| 6454 % @deftypeop category class type name args |
| 6455 \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} |
| 6456 |
| 6457 % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args |
| 6458 \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } |
| 6459 |
| 6460 % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args |
| 6461 % |
| 6462 \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% |
| 6463 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% |
| 6464 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% |
| 6465 } |
| 6466 |
| 6467 %%% Typed variables: |
| 6468 |
| 6469 % @deftypevr category type var args |
| 6470 \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} |
| 6471 |
| 6472 % @deftypecv category class type var args |
| 6473 \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} |
| 6474 |
| 6475 % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args |
| 6476 \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } |
| 6477 |
| 6478 % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args |
| 6479 % |
| 6480 \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% |
| 6481 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% |
| 6482 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% |
| 6483 } |
| 6484 |
| 6485 %%% Untyped variables: |
| 6486 |
| 6487 % @defvr category var args |
| 6488 \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } |
| 6489 |
| 6490 % @defcv category class var args |
| 6491 \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} |
| 6492 |
| 6493 % \defcvof {category of}class var args |
| 6494 \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } |
| 6495 |
| 6496 %%% Type: |
| 6497 % @deftp category name args |
| 6498 \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% |
| 6499 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% |
| 6500 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% |
| 6501 } |
| 6502 |
| 6503 % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: |
| 6504 \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } |
| 6505 \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } |
| 6506 \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } |
| 6507 \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } |
| 6508 \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } |
| 6509 \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } |
| 6510 \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } |
| 6511 \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} |
| 6512 \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} |
| 6513 \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} |
| 6514 \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} |
| 6515 |
| 6516 % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). |
| 6517 % #1 is the category, such as "Function". |
| 6518 % #2 is the return type, if any. |
| 6519 % #3 is the function name. |
| 6520 % |
| 6521 % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. |
| 6522 % |
| 6523 \def\defname#1#2#3{% |
| 6524 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... |
| 6525 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent |
| 6526 % |
| 6527 % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps |
| 6528 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line |
| 6529 % just below it. |
| 6530 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 6531 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} |
| 6532 % |
| 6533 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. |
| 6534 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, |
| 6535 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: |
| 6536 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip |
| 6537 % The continuations: |
| 6538 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent |
| 6539 % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) |
| 6540 \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 |
| 6541 % |
| 6542 % Put the type name to the right margin. |
| 6543 \noindent |
| 6544 \hbox to 0pt{% |
| 6545 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize |
| 6546 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: |
| 6547 \kern\leftskip |
| 6548 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. |
| 6549 }% |
| 6550 % |
| 6551 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: |
| 6552 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 |
| 6553 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
| 6554 {% |
| 6555 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: |
| 6556 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. |
| 6557 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's |
| 6558 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in |
| 6559 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. |
| 6560 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. |
| 6561 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no |
| 6562 % one has made identifiers using them :). |
| 6563 \df \tt |
| 6564 \def\temp{#2}% return value type |
| 6565 \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi |
| 6566 #3% output function name |
| 6567 }% |
| 6568 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm |
| 6569 % |
| 6570 \boldbrax |
| 6571 % arguments will be output next, if any. |
| 6572 } |
| 6573 |
| 6574 % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using |
| 6575 % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in |
| 6576 % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very |
| 6577 % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. |
| 6578 % |
| 6579 \def\defunargs#1{% |
| 6580 % use sl by default (not ttsl), |
| 6581 % tt for the names. |
| 6582 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 |
| 6583 % |
| 6584 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we |
| 6585 % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. |
| 6586 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% |
| 6587 #1% |
| 6588 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 |
| 6589 } |
| 6590 |
| 6591 % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. |
| 6592 % |
| 6593 \def\activeparens{% |
| 6594 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active |
| 6595 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active |
| 6596 \catcode`\&=\active |
| 6597 } |
| 6598 |
| 6599 % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. |
| 6600 \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) |
| 6601 |
| 6602 % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, |
| 6603 % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, |
| 6604 % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. |
| 6605 { |
| 6606 \activeparens |
| 6607 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen |
| 6608 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack |
| 6609 \global\let& = \& |
| 6610 |
| 6611 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} |
| 6612 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} |
| 6613 } |
| 6614 |
| 6615 \newcount\parencount |
| 6616 |
| 6617 % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards |
| 6618 \newif\ifampseen |
| 6619 \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} |
| 6620 |
| 6621 \def\parenfont{% |
| 6622 \ifampseen |
| 6623 % At the first level, print parens in roman, |
| 6624 % otherwise use the default font. |
| 6625 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi |
| 6626 \else |
| 6627 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than |
| 6628 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . |
| 6629 \sf |
| 6630 \fi |
| 6631 } |
| 6632 \def\infirstlevel#1{% |
| 6633 \ifampseen |
| 6634 \ifnum\parencount=1 |
| 6635 #1% |
| 6636 \fi |
| 6637 \fi |
| 6638 } |
| 6639 \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} |
| 6640 |
| 6641 \def\opnr{% |
| 6642 \global\advance\parencount by 1 |
| 6643 {\parenfont(}% |
| 6644 \infirstlevel \bfafterword |
| 6645 } |
| 6646 \def\clnr{% |
| 6647 {\parenfont)}% |
| 6648 \infirstlevel \sl |
| 6649 \global\advance\parencount by -1 |
| 6650 } |
| 6651 |
| 6652 \newcount\brackcount |
| 6653 \def\lbrb{% |
| 6654 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 |
| 6655 {\bf[}% |
| 6656 } |
| 6657 \def\rbrb{% |
| 6658 {\bf]}% |
| 6659 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 |
| 6660 } |
| 6661 |
| 6662 \def\checkparencounts{% |
| 6663 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi |
| 6664 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi |
| 6665 } |
| 6666 % these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually |
| 6667 % has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). |
| 6668 \def\badparencount{% |
| 6669 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% |
| 6670 \global\parencount=0 |
| 6671 } |
| 6672 \def\badbrackcount{% |
| 6673 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% |
| 6674 \global\brackcount=0 |
| 6675 } |
| 6676 |
| 6677 |
| 6678 \message{macros,} |
| 6679 % @macro. |
| 6680 |
| 6681 % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, |
| 6682 % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. |
| 6683 \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined |
| 6684 \newwrite\macscribble |
| 6685 \def\scantokens#1{% |
| 6686 \toks0={#1}% |
| 6687 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp |
| 6688 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% |
| 6689 \immediate\closeout\macscribble |
| 6690 \input \jobname.tmp |
| 6691 } |
| 6692 \fi |
| 6693 |
| 6694 \def\scanmacro#1{% |
| 6695 \begingroup |
| 6696 \newlinechar`\^^M |
| 6697 \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces |
| 6698 % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex |
| 6699 % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active |
| 6700 % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had |
| 6701 % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears |
| 6702 % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 |
| 6703 \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ |
| 6704 % ... and \example |
| 6705 \spaceisspace |
| 6706 % |
| 6707 % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. |
| 6708 % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX |
| 6709 % --kasal, 29nov03 |
| 6710 \scantokens{#1\endinput}% |
| 6711 \endgroup |
| 6712 } |
| 6713 |
| 6714 \def\scanexp#1{% |
| 6715 \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% |
| 6716 \temp |
| 6717 } |
| 6718 |
| 6719 \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters |
| 6720 \newtoks\macname % Macro name |
| 6721 \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? |
| 6722 |
| 6723 % List of all defined macros in the form |
| 6724 % \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2... |
| 6725 % Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split |
| 6726 % if there is a need. |
| 6727 \def\macrolist{} |
| 6728 |
| 6729 % Add the macro to \macrolist |
| 6730 \def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} |
| 6731 \def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% |
| 6732 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}% |
| 6733 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% |
| 6734 } |
| 6735 |
| 6736 % Utility routines. |
| 6737 % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, |
| 6738 % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname |
| 6739 % (except of course we have to play expansion games). |
| 6740 % |
| 6741 \def\cslet#1#2{% |
| 6742 \expandafter\let |
| 6743 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname |
| 6744 \csname#2\endcsname |
| 6745 } |
| 6746 |
| 6747 % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. |
| 6748 % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). |
| 6749 {\catcode`\@=11 |
| 6750 \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} |
| 6751 \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} |
| 6752 \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} |
| 6753 \def\unbrace#1{#1} |
| 6754 \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} |
| 6755 } |
| 6756 |
| 6757 % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. |
| 6758 {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% |
| 6759 \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% |
| 6760 \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% |
| 6761 \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% |
| 6762 } |
| 6763 |
| 6764 % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where |
| 6765 % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active |
| 6766 % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. |
| 6767 |
| 6768 % Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate |
| 6769 % them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to |
| 6770 % confine the change to the current group. |
| 6771 |
| 6772 % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is |
| 6773 % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro |
| 6774 % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. |
| 6775 |
| 6776 \def\scanctxt{% |
| 6777 \catcode`\"=\other |
| 6778 \catcode`\+=\other |
| 6779 \catcode`\<=\other |
| 6780 \catcode`\>=\other |
| 6781 \catcode`\@=\other |
| 6782 \catcode`\^=\other |
| 6783 \catcode`\_=\other |
| 6784 \catcode`\|=\other |
| 6785 \catcode`\~=\other |
| 6786 \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi |
| 6787 } |
| 6788 |
| 6789 \def\scanargctxt{% |
| 6790 \scanctxt |
| 6791 \catcode`\\=\other |
| 6792 \catcode`\^^M=\other |
| 6793 } |
| 6794 |
| 6795 \def\macrobodyctxt{% |
| 6796 \scanctxt |
| 6797 \catcode`\{=\other |
| 6798 \catcode`\}=\other |
| 6799 \catcode`\^^M=\other |
| 6800 \usembodybackslash |
| 6801 } |
| 6802 |
| 6803 \def\macroargctxt{% |
| 6804 \scanctxt |
| 6805 \catcode`\\=\other |
| 6806 } |
| 6807 |
| 6808 % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. |
| 6809 % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N |
| 6810 % where N is the macro parameter number. |
| 6811 % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so |
| 6812 % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. |
| 6813 |
| 6814 {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active |
| 6815 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} |
| 6816 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} |
| 6817 } |
| 6818 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} |
| 6819 |
| 6820 \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} |
| 6821 \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} |
| 6822 |
| 6823 \def\macroxxx#1{% |
| 6824 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist |
| 6825 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments |
| 6826 \paramno=0% |
| 6827 \else |
| 6828 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% |
| 6829 \fi |
| 6830 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname |
| 6831 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% |
| 6832 \else |
| 6833 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax |
| 6834 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi |
| 6835 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% |
| 6836 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% |
| 6837 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% |
| 6838 \fi |
| 6839 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt |
| 6840 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody |
| 6841 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody |
| 6842 \fi} |
| 6843 |
| 6844 \parseargdef\unmacro{% |
| 6845 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname |
| 6846 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% |
| 6847 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% |
| 6848 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: |
| 6849 \begingroup |
| 6850 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax |
| 6851 \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo |
| 6852 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% |
| 6853 \endgroup |
| 6854 \else |
| 6855 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% |
| 6856 \fi |
| 6857 } |
| 6858 |
| 6859 % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any |
| 6860 % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. |
| 6861 % |
| 6862 \def\unmacrodo#1{% |
| 6863 \ifx #1\relax |
| 6864 % remove this |
| 6865 \else |
| 6866 \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1% |
| 6867 \fi |
| 6868 } |
| 6869 |
| 6870 % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a |
| 6871 % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by |
| 6872 % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. |
| 6873 \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} |
| 6874 \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} |
| 6875 \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} |
| 6876 \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} |
| 6877 |
| 6878 % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist |
| 6879 % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah |
| 6880 % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. |
| 6881 % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). |
| 6882 |
| 6883 % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. |
| 6884 % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something |
| 6885 % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine |
| 6886 % it to # just before using the token list produced. |
| 6887 % |
| 6888 % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before |
| 6889 % the macro is used. |
| 6890 |
| 6891 \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% |
| 6892 \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} |
| 6893 \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% |
| 6894 \if#1;\let\next=\relax |
| 6895 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx |
| 6896 \advance\paramno by 1% |
| 6897 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname |
| 6898 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% |
| 6899 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% |
| 6900 \fi\next} |
| 6901 |
| 6902 % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. |
| 6903 % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) |
| 6904 |
| 6905 \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% |
| 6906 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% |
| 6907 \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% |
| 6908 {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% |
| 6909 |
| 6910 % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and |
| 6911 % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. |
| 6912 % Much magic with \expandafter here. |
| 6913 % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file |
| 6914 % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. |
| 6915 \def\defmacro{% |
| 6916 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars |
| 6917 \ifrecursive |
| 6918 \ifcase\paramno |
| 6919 % 0 |
| 6920 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| 6921 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
| 6922 \or % 1 |
| 6923 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| 6924 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
| 6925 \noexpand\braceorline |
| 6926 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% |
| 6927 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% |
| 6928 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
| 6929 \else % many |
| 6930 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| 6931 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
| 6932 \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% |
| 6933 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% |
| 6934 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% |
| 6935 \expandafter\expandafter |
| 6936 \expandafter\xdef |
| 6937 \expandafter\expandafter |
| 6938 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname |
| 6939 \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
| 6940 \fi |
| 6941 \else |
| 6942 \ifcase\paramno |
| 6943 % 0 |
| 6944 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| 6945 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
| 6946 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
| 6947 \or % 1 |
| 6948 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| 6949 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
| 6950 \noexpand\braceorline |
| 6951 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% |
| 6952 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% |
| 6953 \egroup |
| 6954 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
| 6955 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
| 6956 \else % many |
| 6957 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
| 6958 \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
| 6959 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% |
| 6960 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% |
| 6961 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% |
| 6962 \expandafter\expandafter |
| 6963 \expandafter\xdef |
| 6964 \expandafter\expandafter |
| 6965 \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname |
| 6966 \paramlist{% |
| 6967 \egroup |
| 6968 \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
| 6969 \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
| 6970 \fi |
| 6971 \fi} |
| 6972 |
| 6973 \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} |
| 6974 |
| 6975 % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a |
| 6976 % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole |
| 6977 % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence |
| 6978 % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) |
| 6979 \def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} |
| 6980 \def\braceorlinexxx{% |
| 6981 \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else |
| 6982 \expandafter\parsearg |
| 6983 \fi \macnamexxx} |
| 6984 |
| 6985 |
| 6986 % @alias. |
| 6987 % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal |
| 6988 % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. |
| 6989 \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} |
| 6990 \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} |
| 6991 \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% |
| 6992 {% |
| 6993 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty |
| 6994 \addtomacrolist{#1}% |
| 6995 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% |
| 6996 }% |
| 6997 \next |
| 6998 } |
| 6999 |
| 7000 |
| 7001 \message{cross references,} |
| 7002 |
| 7003 \newwrite\auxfile |
| 7004 \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. |
| 7005 \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. |
| 7006 |
| 7007 % @inforef is relatively simple. |
| 7008 \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} |
| 7009 \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{
\ignorespaces #3{}}, |
| 7010 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} |
| 7011 |
| 7012 % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in |
| 7013 % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and |
| 7014 % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: |
| 7015 % @node foo , bar , ... |
| 7016 % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. |
| 7017 % |
| 7018 \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} |
| 7019 % |
| 7020 % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: |
| 7021 % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs |
| 7022 \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} |
| 7023 \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} |
| 7024 |
| 7025 \let\nwnode=\node |
| 7026 \let\lastnode=\empty |
| 7027 |
| 7028 % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the |
| 7029 % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). |
| 7030 % |
| 7031 \def\donoderef#1{% |
| 7032 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else |
| 7033 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% |
| 7034 \global\let\lastnode=\empty |
| 7035 \fi |
| 7036 } |
| 7037 |
| 7038 % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. |
| 7039 % |
| 7040 \newcount\savesfregister |
| 7041 % |
| 7042 \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} |
| 7043 \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} |
| 7044 \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} |
| 7045 |
| 7046 % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an |
| 7047 % anchor), which consists of three parts: |
| 7048 % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, |
| 7049 % or the anchor name. |
| 7050 % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or |
| 7051 % empty for anchors. |
| 7052 % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. |
| 7053 % |
| 7054 % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of |
| 7055 % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: |
| 7056 % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. |
| 7057 % |
| 7058 \def\setref#1#2{% |
| 7059 \pdfmkdest{#1}% |
| 7060 \iflinks |
| 7061 {% |
| 7062 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them |
| 7063 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% |
| 7064 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef |
| 7065 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef |
| 7066 }% |
| 7067 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% |
| 7068 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% |
| 7069 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. |
| 7070 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \ship
out |
| 7071 }% |
| 7072 \fi |
| 7073 } |
| 7074 |
| 7075 % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is |
| 7076 % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed |
| 7077 % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed |
| 7078 % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. |
| 7079 % |
| 7080 \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| 7081 \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| 7082 \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
| 7083 \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup |
| 7084 \unsepspaces |
| 7085 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% |
| 7086 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% |
| 7087 \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% |
| 7088 \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% |
| 7089 \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
| 7090 % No printed node name was explicitly given. |
| 7091 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax |
| 7092 % Use the node name inside the square brackets. |
| 7093 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
| 7094 \else |
| 7095 % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside |
| 7096 % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. |
| 7097 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
| 7098 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. |
| 7099 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
| 7100 \else |
| 7101 \ifhavexrefs |
| 7102 % We know the real title if we have the xref values. |
| 7103 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% |
| 7104 \else |
| 7105 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. |
| 7106 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
| 7107 \fi% |
| 7108 \fi |
| 7109 \fi |
| 7110 \fi |
| 7111 % |
| 7112 % Make link in pdf output. |
| 7113 \ifpdf |
| 7114 {\indexnofonts |
| 7115 \turnoffactive |
| 7116 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ |
| 7117 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. |
| 7118 \getfilename{#4}% |
| 7119 % |
| 7120 % See comments at \activebackslashdouble. |
| 7121 {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}% |
| 7122 \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}% |
| 7123 % |
| 7124 \leavevmode |
| 7125 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% |
| 7126 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 |
| 7127 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}% |
| 7128 \else |
| 7129 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}% |
| 7130 \fi |
| 7131 }% |
| 7132 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% |
| 7133 \fi |
| 7134 % |
| 7135 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" |
| 7136 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the |
| 7137 % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. |
| 7138 {% |
| 7139 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to |
| 7140 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. |
| 7141 \indexnofonts |
| 7142 \turnoffactive |
| 7143 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle |
| 7144 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname |
| 7145 }% |
| 7146 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle |
| 7147 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, |
| 7148 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". |
| 7149 \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt |
| 7150 \refx{#1-snt}{}% |
| 7151 \else |
| 7152 \printedrefname |
| 7153 \fi |
| 7154 % |
| 7155 % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append |
| 7156 % "in MANUALNAME". |
| 7157 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
| 7158 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% |
| 7159 \fi |
| 7160 \else |
| 7161 % node/anchor (non-float) references. |
| 7162 % |
| 7163 % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not |
| 7164 % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will |
| 7165 % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals |
| 7166 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this |
| 7167 % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it |
| 7168 % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. |
| 7169 \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
| 7170 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% |
| 7171 \else |
| 7172 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the |
| 7173 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand |
| 7174 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of |
| 7175 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the |
| 7176 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. |
| 7177 {\turnoffactive |
| 7178 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for |
| 7179 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. |
| 7180 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% |
| 7181 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi |
| 7182 }% |
| 7183 % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. |
| 7184 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname |
| 7185 % |
| 7186 % But we always want a comma and a space: |
| 7187 ,\space |
| 7188 % |
| 7189 % output the `page 3'. |
| 7190 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% |
| 7191 \fi |
| 7192 \fi |
| 7193 \endlink |
| 7194 \endgroup} |
| 7195 |
| 7196 % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref |
| 7197 % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, |
| 7198 % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly |
| 7199 % one that Bob is working on :). |
| 7200 % |
| 7201 \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} |
| 7202 |
| 7203 % Things referred to by \setref. |
| 7204 % |
| 7205 \def\Ynothing{} |
| 7206 \def\Yomitfromtoc{} |
| 7207 \def\Ynumbered{% |
| 7208 \ifnum\secno=0 |
| 7209 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno |
| 7210 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 |
| 7211 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno |
| 7212 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 |
| 7213 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno |
| 7214 \else |
| 7215 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno |
| 7216 \fi\fi\fi |
| 7217 } |
| 7218 \def\Yappendix{% |
| 7219 \ifnum\secno=0 |
| 7220 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% |
| 7221 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 |
| 7222 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno |
| 7223 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 |
| 7224 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno |
| 7225 \else |
| 7226 \putwordSection@tie |
| 7227 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno |
| 7228 \fi\fi\fi |
| 7229 } |
| 7230 |
| 7231 % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. |
| 7232 % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. |
| 7233 % |
| 7234 \def\refx#1#2{% |
| 7235 {% |
| 7236 \indexnofonts |
| 7237 \otherbackslash |
| 7238 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX |
| 7239 \csname XR#1\endcsname |
| 7240 }% |
| 7241 \ifx\thisrefX\relax |
| 7242 % If not defined, say something at least. |
| 7243 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright |
| 7244 \iflinks |
| 7245 \ifhavexrefs |
| 7246 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% |
| 7247 \else |
| 7248 \ifwarnedxrefs\else |
| 7249 \global\warnedxrefstrue |
| 7250 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% |
| 7251 \fi |
| 7252 \fi |
| 7253 \fi |
| 7254 \else |
| 7255 % It's defined, so just use it. |
| 7256 \thisrefX |
| 7257 \fi |
| 7258 #2% Output the suffix in any case. |
| 7259 } |
| 7260 |
| 7261 % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's |
| 7262 % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid |
| 7263 % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. |
| 7264 % |
| 7265 \def\xrdef#1#2{% |
| 7266 {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current |
| 7267 % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these |
| 7268 % mess up the control sequence name. |
| 7269 \indexnofonts |
| 7270 \turnoffactive |
| 7271 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% |
| 7272 }% |
| 7273 % |
| 7274 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref |
| 7275 % |
| 7276 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? |
| 7277 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname |
| 7278 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. |
| 7279 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist |
| 7280 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname |
| 7281 % |
| 7282 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? |
| 7283 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax |
| 7284 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do |
| 7285 \else |
| 7286 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. |
| 7287 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% |
| 7288 \fi |
| 7289 % |
| 7290 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, |
| 7291 % for later use in \listoffloats. |
| 7292 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 |
| 7293 {\safexrefname}}% |
| 7294 \fi |
| 7295 } |
| 7296 |
| 7297 % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. |
| 7298 % |
| 7299 \def\tryauxfile{% |
| 7300 \openin 1 \jobname.aux |
| 7301 \ifeof 1 \else |
| 7302 \readdatafile{aux}% |
| 7303 \global\havexrefstrue |
| 7304 \fi |
| 7305 \closein 1 |
| 7306 } |
| 7307 |
| 7308 \def\setupdatafile{% |
| 7309 \catcode`\^^@=\other |
| 7310 \catcode`\^^A=\other |
| 7311 \catcode`\^^B=\other |
| 7312 \catcode`\^^C=\other |
| 7313 \catcode`\^^D=\other |
| 7314 \catcode`\^^E=\other |
| 7315 \catcode`\^^F=\other |
| 7316 \catcode`\^^G=\other |
| 7317 \catcode`\^^H=\other |
| 7318 \catcode`\^^K=\other |
| 7319 \catcode`\^^L=\other |
| 7320 \catcode`\^^N=\other |
| 7321 \catcode`\^^P=\other |
| 7322 \catcode`\^^Q=\other |
| 7323 \catcode`\^^R=\other |
| 7324 \catcode`\^^S=\other |
| 7325 \catcode`\^^T=\other |
| 7326 \catcode`\^^U=\other |
| 7327 \catcode`\^^V=\other |
| 7328 \catcode`\^^W=\other |
| 7329 \catcode`\^^X=\other |
| 7330 \catcode`\^^Z=\other |
| 7331 \catcode`\^^[=\other |
| 7332 \catcode`\^^\=\other |
| 7333 \catcode`\^^]=\other |
| 7334 \catcode`\^^^=\other |
| 7335 \catcode`\^^_=\other |
| 7336 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. |
| 7337 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't |
| 7338 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, |
| 7339 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ |
| 7340 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat |
| 7341 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first |
| 7342 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could |
| 7343 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. |
| 7344 % |
| 7345 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: |
| 7346 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter |
| 7347 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. |
| 7348 % |
| 7349 \catcode`\^=\other |
| 7350 % |
| 7351 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... |
| 7352 \catcode`\~=\other |
| 7353 \catcode`\[=\other |
| 7354 \catcode`\]=\other |
| 7355 \catcode`\"=\other |
| 7356 \catcode`\_=\other |
| 7357 \catcode`\|=\other |
| 7358 \catcode`\<=\other |
| 7359 \catcode`\>=\other |
| 7360 \catcode`\$=\other |
| 7361 \catcode`\#=\other |
| 7362 \catcode`\&=\other |
| 7363 \catcode`\%=\other |
| 7364 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off |
| 7365 % |
| 7366 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ |
| 7367 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than |
| 7368 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ |
| 7369 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* |
| 7370 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that |
| 7371 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for |
| 7372 % now. --karl, 15jan04. |
| 7373 \catcode`\\=\other |
| 7374 % |
| 7375 % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. |
| 7376 {% |
| 7377 \count1=128 |
| 7378 \def\loop{% |
| 7379 \catcode\count1=\other |
| 7380 \advance\count1 by 1 |
| 7381 \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi |
| 7382 }% |
| 7383 }% |
| 7384 % |
| 7385 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. |
| 7386 \catcode`\{=1 |
| 7387 \catcode`\}=2 |
| 7388 \catcode`\@=0 |
| 7389 } |
| 7390 |
| 7391 \def\readdatafile#1{% |
| 7392 \begingroup |
| 7393 \setupdatafile |
| 7394 \input\jobname.#1 |
| 7395 \endgroup} |
| 7396 |
| 7397 |
| 7398 \message{insertions,} |
| 7399 % including footnotes. |
| 7400 |
| 7401 \newcount \footnoteno |
| 7402 |
| 7403 % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is |
| 7404 % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a |
| 7405 % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is |
| 7406 % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a |
| 7407 % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) |
| 7408 \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } |
| 7409 |
| 7410 % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. |
| 7411 \let\footnotestyle=\comment |
| 7412 |
| 7413 {\catcode `\@=11 |
| 7414 % |
| 7415 % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. |
| 7416 \gdef\footnote{% |
| 7417 \let\indent=\ptexindent |
| 7418 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent |
| 7419 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne |
| 7420 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% |
| 7421 % |
| 7422 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the |
| 7423 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. |
| 7424 \let\@sf\empty |
| 7425 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi |
| 7426 % |
| 7427 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. |
| 7428 \unskip |
| 7429 \thisfootno\@sf |
| 7430 \dofootnote |
| 7431 }% |
| 7432 |
| 7433 % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the |
| 7434 % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. |
| 7435 % |
| 7436 % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses |
| 7437 % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when |
| 7438 % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. |
| 7439 % |
| 7440 \gdef\dofootnote{% |
| 7441 \insert\footins\bgroup |
| 7442 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
| 7443 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. |
| 7444 % So reset some parameters. |
| 7445 \hsize=\pagewidth |
| 7446 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty |
| 7447 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes |
| 7448 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox |
| 7449 \floatingpenalty\@MM |
| 7450 \leftskip\z@skip |
| 7451 \rightskip\z@skip |
| 7452 \spaceskip\z@skip |
| 7453 \xspaceskip\z@skip |
| 7454 \parindent\defaultparindent |
| 7455 % |
| 7456 \smallfonts \rm |
| 7457 % |
| 7458 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears |
| 7459 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use |
| 7460 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote |
| 7461 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). |
| 7462 \let\noindent = \relax |
| 7463 % |
| 7464 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the |
| 7465 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. |
| 7466 \everypar = {\hang}% |
| 7467 \textindent{\thisfootno}% |
| 7468 % |
| 7469 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this |
| 7470 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it |
| 7471 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. |
| 7472 \footstrut |
| 7473 \futurelet\next\fo@t |
| 7474 } |
| 7475 }%end \catcode `\@=11 |
| 7476 |
| 7477 % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create |
| 7478 % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion |
| 7479 % would be lost. |
| 7480 % Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote |
| 7481 % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. |
| 7482 % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. |
| 7483 |
| 7484 % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. |
| 7485 % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled |
| 7486 % out prematurely. |
| 7487 % |
| 7488 \def\startsavinginserts{% |
| 7489 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert |
| 7490 \let\insert\saveinsert |
| 7491 \else |
| 7492 \let\checkinserts\relax |
| 7493 \fi |
| 7494 } |
| 7495 |
| 7496 % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and |
| 7497 % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. |
| 7498 % |
| 7499 \def\saveinsert#1{% |
| 7500 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% |
| 7501 \afterassignment\next |
| 7502 % swallow the left brace |
| 7503 \let\temp = |
| 7504 } |
| 7505 \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} |
| 7506 \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} |
| 7507 |
| 7508 \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} |
| 7509 |
| 7510 \def\placesaveins#1{% |
| 7511 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname |
| 7512 {\box#1}% |
| 7513 } |
| 7514 |
| 7515 % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: |
| 7516 { |
| 7517 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) |
| 7518 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} |
| 7519 } |
| 7520 |
| 7521 % initialization: |
| 7522 \def\newsaveins #1{% |
| 7523 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% |
| 7524 \next |
| 7525 } |
| 7526 \def\newsaveinsX #1{% |
| 7527 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% |
| 7528 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts |
| 7529 \checksaveins #1}% |
| 7530 } |
| 7531 |
| 7532 % initialize: |
| 7533 \let\checkinserts\empty |
| 7534 \newsaveins\footins |
| 7535 \newsaveins\margin |
| 7536 |
| 7537 |
| 7538 % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. |
| 7539 % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. |
| 7540 % |
| 7541 % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image |
| 7542 % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get |
| 7543 % undone and the next image would fail. |
| 7544 \openin 1 = epsf.tex |
| 7545 \ifeof 1 \else |
| 7546 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in |
| 7547 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). |
| 7548 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% |
| 7549 \input epsf.tex |
| 7550 \fi |
| 7551 \closein 1 |
| 7552 % |
| 7553 % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. |
| 7554 \newif\ifwarnednoepsf |
| 7555 \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to |
| 7556 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get |
| 7557 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} |
| 7558 % |
| 7559 \def\image#1{% |
| 7560 \ifx\epsfbox\undefined |
| 7561 \ifwarnednoepsf \else |
| 7562 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp |
| 7563 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% |
| 7564 \global\warnednoepsftrue |
| 7565 \fi |
| 7566 \else |
| 7567 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish |
| 7568 \fi |
| 7569 } |
| 7570 % |
| 7571 % Arguments to @image: |
| 7572 % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. |
| 7573 % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. |
| 7574 % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. |
| 7575 % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. |
| 7576 % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. |
| 7577 \newif\ifimagevmode |
| 7578 \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup |
| 7579 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example |
| 7580 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names |
| 7581 % If the image is by itself, center it. |
| 7582 \ifvmode |
| 7583 \imagevmodetrue |
| 7584 \nobreak\medskip |
| 7585 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert |
| 7586 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space |
| 7587 % above and below. |
| 7588 \nobreak\vskip\parskip |
| 7589 \nobreak |
| 7590 \fi |
| 7591 % |
| 7592 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing |
| 7593 % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if |
| 7594 % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation. |
| 7595 \noindent |
| 7596 % |
| 7597 % Output the image. |
| 7598 \ifpdf |
| 7599 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% |
| 7600 \else |
| 7601 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. |
| 7602 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi |
| 7603 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi |
| 7604 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% |
| 7605 \fi |
| 7606 % |
| 7607 \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image |
| 7608 \endgroup} |
| 7609 |
| 7610 |
| 7611 % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, |
| 7612 % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the |
| 7613 % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. |
| 7614 % |
| 7615 \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} |
| 7616 |
| 7617 % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. |
| 7618 \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} |
| 7619 |
| 7620 % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically |
| 7621 % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, |
| 7622 % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. |
| 7623 % |
| 7624 % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to |
| 7625 % be referable. |
| 7626 % |
| 7627 % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It |
| 7628 % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). |
| 7629 % |
| 7630 % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each |
| 7631 % chapter-level command. |
| 7632 \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty |
| 7633 % |
| 7634 \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% |
| 7635 \let\thiscaption=\empty |
| 7636 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty |
| 7637 % |
| 7638 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. |
| 7639 % |
| 7640 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an |
| 7641 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 |
| 7642 % |
| 7643 \startsavinginserts |
| 7644 % |
| 7645 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. |
| 7646 \par |
| 7647 % |
| 7648 \vtop\bgroup |
| 7649 \def\floattype{#1}% |
| 7650 \def\floatlabel{#2}% |
| 7651 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. |
| 7652 % |
| 7653 \ifx\floattype\empty |
| 7654 \let\safefloattype=\empty |
| 7655 \else |
| 7656 {% |
| 7657 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, |
| 7658 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. |
| 7659 \indexnofonts |
| 7660 \turnoffactive |
| 7661 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% |
| 7662 }% |
| 7663 \fi |
| 7664 % |
| 7665 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. |
| 7666 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else |
| 7667 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, |
| 7668 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) |
| 7669 % |
| 7670 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname |
| 7671 \global\advance\floatno by 1 |
| 7672 % |
| 7673 {% |
| 7674 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the |
| 7675 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float |
| 7676 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from |
| 7677 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the |
| 7678 % lists of floats. |
| 7679 % |
| 7680 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% |
| 7681 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% |
| 7682 }% |
| 7683 \fi |
| 7684 % |
| 7685 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. |
| 7686 \vskip\parskip |
| 7687 % |
| 7688 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. |
| 7689 \restorefirstparagraphindent |
| 7690 } |
| 7691 |
| 7692 % we have these possibilities: |
| 7693 % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap |
| 7694 % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 |
| 7695 % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap |
| 7696 % @float Foo & no caption: Foo |
| 7697 % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap |
| 7698 % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 |
| 7699 % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap |
| 7700 % @float & no caption: |
| 7701 % |
| 7702 \def\Efloat{% |
| 7703 \let\floatident = \empty |
| 7704 % |
| 7705 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. |
| 7706 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi |
| 7707 % |
| 7708 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. |
| 7709 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else |
| 7710 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. |
| 7711 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% |
| 7712 \fi |
| 7713 % the number. |
| 7714 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% |
| 7715 \fi |
| 7716 % |
| 7717 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in |
| 7718 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. |
| 7719 \let\captionline = \floatident |
| 7720 % |
| 7721 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else |
| 7722 \ifx\floatident\empty \else |
| 7723 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between |
| 7724 \fi |
| 7725 % |
| 7726 % caption text. |
| 7727 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% |
| 7728 \fi |
| 7729 % |
| 7730 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. |
| 7731 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. |
| 7732 \ifx\captionline\empty \else |
| 7733 \vskip.5\parskip |
| 7734 \captionline |
| 7735 % |
| 7736 % Space below caption. |
| 7737 \vskip\parskip |
| 7738 \fi |
| 7739 % |
| 7740 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this |
| 7741 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. |
| 7742 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else |
| 7743 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as |
| 7744 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short |
| 7745 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. |
| 7746 {% |
| 7747 \atdummies |
| 7748 % |
| 7749 % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M |
| 7750 % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so |
| 7751 % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. |
| 7752 \scanexp{% |
| 7753 \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% |
| 7754 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty |
| 7755 \thiscaption |
| 7756 \else |
| 7757 \thisshortcaption |
| 7758 \fi |
| 7759 }% |
| 7760 }% |
| 7761 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident |
| 7762 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% |
| 7763 }% |
| 7764 \fi |
| 7765 \egroup % end of \vtop |
| 7766 % |
| 7767 % place the captured inserts |
| 7768 % |
| 7769 % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning |
| 7770 % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly |
| 7771 % float. --kasal, 26may04 |
| 7772 % |
| 7773 \checkinserts |
| 7774 } |
| 7775 |
| 7776 % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. |
| 7777 % |
| 7778 \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% |
| 7779 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% |
| 7780 } |
| 7781 |
| 7782 % @caption, @shortcaption |
| 7783 % |
| 7784 \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} |
| 7785 \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} |
| 7786 \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} |
| 7787 \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} |
| 7788 |
| 7789 % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are |
| 7790 % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. |
| 7791 \def\getfloatno#1{% |
| 7792 \ifx#1\relax |
| 7793 % Haven't seen this figure type before. |
| 7794 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% |
| 7795 % |
| 7796 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. |
| 7797 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos |
| 7798 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% |
| 7799 \fi |
| 7800 \let\floatno#1% |
| 7801 } |
| 7802 |
| 7803 % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref |
| 7804 % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we |
| 7805 % first read the @float command. |
| 7806 % |
| 7807 \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% |
| 7808 |
| 7809 % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can |
| 7810 % distinguish floats from other xref types. |
| 7811 \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} |
| 7812 |
| 7813 % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional |
| 7814 % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic |
| 7815 % \lastsection value which we \setref above. |
| 7816 % |
| 7817 \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} |
| 7818 % |
| 7819 % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the |
| 7820 % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. |
| 7821 % |
| 7822 \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% |
| 7823 \def\temp{#1}% |
| 7824 \def\iffloattype{#2}% |
| 7825 \ifx\temp\floatmagic |
| 7826 } |
| 7827 |
| 7828 % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. |
| 7829 % |
| 7830 \parseargdef\listoffloats{% |
| 7831 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype |
| 7832 {% |
| 7833 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, |
| 7834 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. |
| 7835 \indexnofonts |
| 7836 \turnoffactive |
| 7837 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% |
| 7838 }% |
| 7839 % |
| 7840 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. |
| 7841 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax |
| 7842 \ifhavexrefs |
| 7843 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. |
| 7844 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% |
| 7845 \fi |
| 7846 \else |
| 7847 \begingroup |
| 7848 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc |
| 7849 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo |
| 7850 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname |
| 7851 \endgroup |
| 7852 \fi |
| 7853 } |
| 7854 |
| 7855 % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the |
| 7856 % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the |
| 7857 % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which |
| 7858 % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. |
| 7859 % |
| 7860 % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since |
| 7861 % they won't appear in the aux file). |
| 7862 % |
| 7863 \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} |
| 7864 \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% |
| 7865 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just |
| 7866 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the |
| 7867 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link |
| 7868 % in pdf output. |
| 7869 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% |
| 7870 % |
| 7871 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. |
| 7872 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% |
| 7873 \writeentry |
| 7874 }} |
| 7875 |
| 7876 |
| 7877 \message{localization,} |
| 7878 |
| 7879 % For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very |
| 7880 % early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language |
| 7881 % (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. |
| 7882 % |
| 7883 { |
| 7884 \catcode`\_ = \active |
| 7885 \globaldefs=1 |
| 7886 \parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup |
| 7887 \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames |
| 7888 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. |
| 7889 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. |
| 7890 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex |
| 7891 \ifeof 1 |
| 7892 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}% |
| 7893 \else |
| 7894 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist |
| 7895 \input txi-#1.tex |
| 7896 \fi |
| 7897 \closein 1 |
| 7898 \endgroup % end raw TeX |
| 7899 \endgroup} |
| 7900 } |
| 7901 % |
| 7902 % If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, |
| 7903 % try txi-de.tex. |
| 7904 % |
| 7905 \def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% |
| 7906 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex |
| 7907 \ifeof 1 |
| 7908 \errhelp = \nolanghelp |
| 7909 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% |
| 7910 \else |
| 7911 \input txi-#1.tex |
| 7912 \fi |
| 7913 \closein 1 |
| 7914 } |
| 7915 % |
| 7916 \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or |
| 7917 is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current |
| 7918 directory should work if nowhere else does.} |
| 7919 |
| 7920 % This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the |
| 7921 % \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and |
| 7922 % third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. |
| 7923 % |
| 7924 % The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. |
| 7925 % See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., |
| 7926 % /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. |
| 7927 % |
| 7928 % With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all |
| 7929 % available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in |
| 7930 % Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the |
| 7931 % accented characters problem.) |
| 7932 % |
| 7933 \catcode`@=11 |
| 7934 \def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% |
| 7935 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. |
| 7936 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax |
| 7937 \message{no patterns for #1}% |
| 7938 \else |
| 7939 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname |
| 7940 \fi |
| 7941 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. |
| 7942 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax |
| 7943 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax |
| 7944 } |
| 7945 |
| 7946 % Helpers for encodings. |
| 7947 % Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. |
| 7948 % |
| 7949 \def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% |
| 7950 \count255=128 |
| 7951 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 |
| 7952 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax |
| 7953 \advance\count255 by 1 |
| 7954 \repeat |
| 7955 } |
| 7956 |
| 7957 \def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% |
| 7958 \count255=128 |
| 7959 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 |
| 7960 \catcode\count255=#1\relax |
| 7961 \advance\count255 by 1 |
| 7962 \repeat |
| 7963 } |
| 7964 |
| 7965 % @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters |
| 7966 % according to the specified encoding. |
| 7967 % |
| 7968 \parseargdef\documentencoding{% |
| 7969 % Encoding being declared for the document. |
| 7970 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% |
| 7971 % |
| 7972 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able |
| 7973 % to compare them with \ifx. |
| 7974 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% |
| 7975 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% |
| 7976 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% |
| 7977 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% |
| 7978 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% |
| 7979 % |
| 7980 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii |
| 7981 \asciichardefs |
| 7982 % |
| 7983 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo |
| 7984 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
| 7985 \lattwochardefs |
| 7986 % |
| 7987 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone |
| 7988 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
| 7989 \latonechardefs |
| 7990 % |
| 7991 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine |
| 7992 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
| 7993 \latninechardefs |
| 7994 % |
| 7995 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight |
| 7996 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
| 7997 \utfeightchardefs |
| 7998 % |
| 7999 \else |
| 8000 \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}% |
| 8001 % |
| 8002 \fi % utfeight |
| 8003 \fi % latnine |
| 8004 \fi % latone |
| 8005 \fi % lattwo |
| 8006 \fi % ascii |
| 8007 } |
| 8008 |
| 8009 % A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available |
| 8010 % the default font encoding (OT1). |
| 8011 % |
| 8012 \def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}} |
| 8013 |
| 8014 % Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. |
| 8015 \def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} |
| 8016 |
| 8017 % First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be |
| 8018 % correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of |
| 8019 % macros containing the character definitions. |
| 8020 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active |
| 8021 % |
| 8022 % Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. |
| 8023 \def\latonechardefs{% |
| 8024 \gdef^^a0{~} |
| 8025 \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown} |
| 8026 \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}} |
| 8027 \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}} |
| 8028 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} |
| 8029 \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}} |
| 8030 \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}} |
| 8031 \gdef^^a7{\S} |
| 8032 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} |
| 8033 \gdef^^a9{\copyright} |
| 8034 \gdef^^aa{\ordf} |
| 8035 \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft} |
| 8036 \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$} |
| 8037 \gdef^^ad{\-} |
| 8038 \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol} |
| 8039 \gdef^^af{\={}} |
| 8040 % |
| 8041 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} |
| 8042 \gdef^^b1{$\pm$} |
| 8043 \gdef^^b2{$^2$} |
| 8044 \gdef^^b3{$^3$} |
| 8045 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} |
| 8046 \gdef^^b5{$\mu$} |
| 8047 \gdef^^b6{\P} |
| 8048 % |
| 8049 \gdef^^b7{$^.$} |
| 8050 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } |
| 8051 \gdef^^b9{$^1$} |
| 8052 \gdef^^ba{\ordm} |
| 8053 % |
| 8054 \gdef^^bb{\guilletright} |
| 8055 \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$} |
| 8056 \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$} |
| 8057 \gdef^^be{$3\over4$} |
| 8058 \gdef^^bf{\questiondown} |
| 8059 % |
| 8060 \gdef^^c0{\`A} |
| 8061 \gdef^^c1{\'A} |
| 8062 \gdef^^c2{\^A} |
| 8063 \gdef^^c3{\~A} |
| 8064 \gdef^^c4{\"A} |
| 8065 \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A} |
| 8066 \gdef^^c6{\AE} |
| 8067 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} |
| 8068 \gdef^^c8{\`E} |
| 8069 \gdef^^c9{\'E} |
| 8070 \gdef^^ca{\^E} |
| 8071 \gdef^^cb{\"E} |
| 8072 \gdef^^cc{\`I} |
| 8073 \gdef^^cd{\'I} |
| 8074 \gdef^^ce{\^I} |
| 8075 \gdef^^cf{\"I} |
| 8076 % |
| 8077 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}} |
| 8078 \gdef^^d1{\~N} |
| 8079 \gdef^^d2{\`O} |
| 8080 \gdef^^d3{\'O} |
| 8081 \gdef^^d4{\^O} |
| 8082 \gdef^^d5{\~O} |
| 8083 \gdef^^d6{\"O} |
| 8084 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} |
| 8085 \gdef^^d8{\O} |
| 8086 \gdef^^d9{\`U} |
| 8087 \gdef^^da{\'U} |
| 8088 \gdef^^db{\^U} |
| 8089 \gdef^^dc{\"U} |
| 8090 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} |
| 8091 \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}} |
| 8092 \gdef^^df{\ss} |
| 8093 % |
| 8094 \gdef^^e0{\`a} |
| 8095 \gdef^^e1{\'a} |
| 8096 \gdef^^e2{\^a} |
| 8097 \gdef^^e3{\~a} |
| 8098 \gdef^^e4{\"a} |
| 8099 \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a} |
| 8100 \gdef^^e6{\ae} |
| 8101 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} |
| 8102 \gdef^^e8{\`e} |
| 8103 \gdef^^e9{\'e} |
| 8104 \gdef^^ea{\^e} |
| 8105 \gdef^^eb{\"e} |
| 8106 \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} |
| 8107 \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} |
| 8108 \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} |
| 8109 \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} |
| 8110 % |
| 8111 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}} |
| 8112 \gdef^^f1{\~n} |
| 8113 \gdef^^f2{\`o} |
| 8114 \gdef^^f3{\'o} |
| 8115 \gdef^^f4{\^o} |
| 8116 \gdef^^f5{\~o} |
| 8117 \gdef^^f6{\"o} |
| 8118 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} |
| 8119 \gdef^^f8{\o} |
| 8120 \gdef^^f9{\`u} |
| 8121 \gdef^^fa{\'u} |
| 8122 \gdef^^fb{\^u} |
| 8123 \gdef^^fc{\"u} |
| 8124 \gdef^^fd{\'y} |
| 8125 \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}} |
| 8126 \gdef^^ff{\"y} |
| 8127 } |
| 8128 |
| 8129 % Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. |
| 8130 \def\latninechardefs{% |
| 8131 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. |
| 8132 \latonechardefs |
| 8133 % |
| 8134 \gdef^^a4{\euro} |
| 8135 \gdef^^a6{\v S} |
| 8136 \gdef^^a8{\v s} |
| 8137 \gdef^^b4{\v Z} |
| 8138 \gdef^^b8{\v z} |
| 8139 \gdef^^bc{\OE} |
| 8140 \gdef^^bd{\oe} |
| 8141 \gdef^^be{\"Y} |
| 8142 } |
| 8143 |
| 8144 % Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. |
| 8145 \def\lattwochardefs{% |
| 8146 \gdef^^a0{~} |
| 8147 \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}} |
| 8148 \gdef^^a2{\u{}} |
| 8149 \gdef^^a3{\L} |
| 8150 \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} |
| 8151 \gdef^^a5{\v L} |
| 8152 \gdef^^a6{\'S} |
| 8153 \gdef^^a7{\S} |
| 8154 \gdef^^a8{\"{}} |
| 8155 \gdef^^a9{\v S} |
| 8156 \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S} |
| 8157 \gdef^^ab{\v T} |
| 8158 \gdef^^ac{\'Z} |
| 8159 \gdef^^ad{\-} |
| 8160 \gdef^^ae{\v Z} |
| 8161 \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z} |
| 8162 % |
| 8163 \gdef^^b0{\textdegree} |
| 8164 \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}} |
| 8165 \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }} |
| 8166 \gdef^^b3{\l} |
| 8167 \gdef^^b4{\'{}} |
| 8168 \gdef^^b5{\v l} |
| 8169 \gdef^^b6{\'s} |
| 8170 \gdef^^b7{\v{}} |
| 8171 \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ } |
| 8172 \gdef^^b9{\v s} |
| 8173 \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s} |
| 8174 \gdef^^bb{\v t} |
| 8175 \gdef^^bc{\'z} |
| 8176 \gdef^^bd{\H{}} |
| 8177 \gdef^^be{\v z} |
| 8178 \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z} |
| 8179 % |
| 8180 \gdef^^c0{\'R} |
| 8181 \gdef^^c1{\'A} |
| 8182 \gdef^^c2{\^A} |
| 8183 \gdef^^c3{\u A} |
| 8184 \gdef^^c4{\"A} |
| 8185 \gdef^^c5{\'L} |
| 8186 \gdef^^c6{\'C} |
| 8187 \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C} |
| 8188 \gdef^^c8{\v C} |
| 8189 \gdef^^c9{\'E} |
| 8190 \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}} |
| 8191 \gdef^^cb{\"E} |
| 8192 \gdef^^cc{\v E} |
| 8193 \gdef^^cd{\'I} |
| 8194 \gdef^^ce{\^I} |
| 8195 \gdef^^cf{\v D} |
| 8196 % |
| 8197 \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} |
| 8198 \gdef^^d1{\'N} |
| 8199 \gdef^^d2{\v N} |
| 8200 \gdef^^d3{\'O} |
| 8201 \gdef^^d4{\^O} |
| 8202 \gdef^^d5{\H O} |
| 8203 \gdef^^d6{\"O} |
| 8204 \gdef^^d7{$\times$} |
| 8205 \gdef^^d8{\v R} |
| 8206 \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U} |
| 8207 \gdef^^da{\'U} |
| 8208 \gdef^^db{\H U} |
| 8209 \gdef^^dc{\"U} |
| 8210 \gdef^^dd{\'Y} |
| 8211 \gdef^^de{\cedilla T} |
| 8212 \gdef^^df{\ss} |
| 8213 % |
| 8214 \gdef^^e0{\'r} |
| 8215 \gdef^^e1{\'a} |
| 8216 \gdef^^e2{\^a} |
| 8217 \gdef^^e3{\u a} |
| 8218 \gdef^^e4{\"a} |
| 8219 \gdef^^e5{\'l} |
| 8220 \gdef^^e6{\'c} |
| 8221 \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c} |
| 8222 \gdef^^e8{\v c} |
| 8223 \gdef^^e9{\'e} |
| 8224 \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}} |
| 8225 \gdef^^eb{\"e} |
| 8226 \gdef^^ec{\v e} |
| 8227 \gdef^^ed{\'\i} |
| 8228 \gdef^^ee{\^\i} |
| 8229 \gdef^^ef{\v d} |
| 8230 % |
| 8231 \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}} |
| 8232 \gdef^^f1{\'n} |
| 8233 \gdef^^f2{\v n} |
| 8234 \gdef^^f3{\'o} |
| 8235 \gdef^^f4{\^o} |
| 8236 \gdef^^f5{\H o} |
| 8237 \gdef^^f6{\"o} |
| 8238 \gdef^^f7{$\div$} |
| 8239 \gdef^^f8{\v r} |
| 8240 \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u} |
| 8241 \gdef^^fa{\'u} |
| 8242 \gdef^^fb{\H u} |
| 8243 \gdef^^fc{\"u} |
| 8244 \gdef^^fd{\'y} |
| 8245 \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t} |
| 8246 \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}} |
| 8247 } |
| 8248 |
| 8249 % UTF-8 character definitions. |
| 8250 % |
| 8251 % This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some |
| 8252 % changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by |
| 8253 % permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. |
| 8254 % |
| 8255 \newcount\countUTFx |
| 8256 \newcount\countUTFy |
| 8257 \newcount\countUTFz |
| 8258 |
| 8259 \gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter |
| 8260 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} |
| 8261 % |
| 8262 \gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter |
| 8263 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} |
| 8264 % |
| 8265 \gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter |
| 8266 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} |
| 8267 |
| 8268 \gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% |
| 8269 \ifx #1\relax |
| 8270 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% |
| 8271 \else |
| 8272 \expandafter #1% |
| 8273 \fi |
| 8274 } |
| 8275 |
| 8276 \begingroup |
| 8277 \catcode`\~13 |
| 8278 \catcode`\"12 |
| 8279 |
| 8280 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% |
| 8281 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active |
| 8282 \uccode`\~\countUTFx |
| 8283 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% |
| 8284 \advance\countUTFx by 1 |
| 8285 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy |
| 8286 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop |
| 8287 \fi} |
| 8288 |
| 8289 \countUTFx = "C2 |
| 8290 \countUTFy = "E0 |
| 8291 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% |
| 8292 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}} |
| 8293 \UTFviiiLoop |
| 8294 |
| 8295 \countUTFx = "E0 |
| 8296 \countUTFy = "F0 |
| 8297 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% |
| 8298 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}} |
| 8299 \UTFviiiLoop |
| 8300 |
| 8301 \countUTFx = "F0 |
| 8302 \countUTFy = "F4 |
| 8303 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% |
| 8304 \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}} |
| 8305 \UTFviiiLoop |
| 8306 \endgroup |
| 8307 |
| 8308 \begingroup |
| 8309 \catcode`\"=12 |
| 8310 \catcode`\<=12 |
| 8311 \catcode`\.=12 |
| 8312 \catcode`\,=12 |
| 8313 \catcode`\;=12 |
| 8314 \catcode`\!=12 |
| 8315 \catcode`\~=13 |
| 8316 |
| 8317 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{% |
| 8318 \countUTFz = "#1\relax |
| 8319 \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}% |
| 8320 \begingroup |
| 8321 \parseXMLCharref |
| 8322 \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{% |
| 8323 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}% |
| 8324 \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{% |
| 8325 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}% |
| 8326 \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{% |
| 8327 \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}% |
| 8328 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter |
| 8329 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter |
| 8330 \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}% |
| 8331 \endgroup} |
| 8332 |
| 8333 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% |
| 8334 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax |
| 8335 \errhelp = \EMsimple |
| 8336 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% |
| 8337 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax |
| 8338 \parseUTFviiiA,% |
| 8339 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,% |
| 8340 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax |
| 8341 \parseUTFviiiA;% |
| 8342 \parseUTFviiiA,% |
| 8343 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}% |
| 8344 \else |
| 8345 \parseUTFviiiA;% |
| 8346 \parseUTFviiiA,% |
| 8347 \parseUTFviiiA!% |
| 8348 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}% |
| 8349 \fi\fi\fi |
| 8350 } |
| 8351 |
| 8352 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% |
| 8353 \countUTFx = \countUTFz |
| 8354 \divide\countUTFz by 64 |
| 8355 \countUTFy = \countUTFz |
| 8356 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 |
| 8357 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz |
| 8358 \advance\countUTFx by 128 |
| 8359 \uccode `#1\countUTFx |
| 8360 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} |
| 8361 |
| 8362 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% |
| 8363 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax |
| 8364 \uccode `#3\countUTFz |
| 8365 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} |
| 8366 \endgroup |
| 8367 |
| 8368 \def\utfeightchardefs{% |
| 8369 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie} |
| 8370 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown} |
| 8371 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds} |
| 8372 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }} |
| 8373 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright} |
| 8374 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf} |
| 8375 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft} |
| 8376 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-} |
| 8377 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol} |
| 8378 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }} |
| 8379 |
| 8380 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }} |
| 8381 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }} |
| 8382 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }} |
| 8383 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm} |
| 8384 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright} |
| 8385 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown} |
| 8386 |
| 8387 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A} |
| 8388 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A} |
| 8389 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A} |
| 8390 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A} |
| 8391 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A} |
| 8392 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA} |
| 8393 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE} |
| 8394 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}} |
| 8395 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E} |
| 8396 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E} |
| 8397 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E} |
| 8398 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E} |
| 8399 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I} |
| 8400 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I} |
| 8401 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I} |
| 8402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I} |
| 8403 |
| 8404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N} |
| 8405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O} |
| 8406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O} |
| 8407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O} |
| 8408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O} |
| 8409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O} |
| 8410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O} |
| 8411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U} |
| 8412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U} |
| 8413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U} |
| 8414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U} |
| 8415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y} |
| 8416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss} |
| 8417 |
| 8418 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a} |
| 8419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a} |
| 8420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a} |
| 8421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a} |
| 8422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a} |
| 8423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa} |
| 8424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae} |
| 8425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}} |
| 8426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e} |
| 8427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e} |
| 8428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e} |
| 8429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e} |
| 8430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}} |
| 8431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}} |
| 8432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}} |
| 8433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}} |
| 8434 |
| 8435 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n} |
| 8436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o} |
| 8437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o} |
| 8438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o} |
| 8439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o} |
| 8440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o} |
| 8441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o} |
| 8442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u} |
| 8443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u} |
| 8444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u} |
| 8445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u} |
| 8446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y} |
| 8447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y} |
| 8448 |
| 8449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A} |
| 8450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a} |
| 8451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}} |
| 8452 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}} |
| 8453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}} |
| 8454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}} |
| 8455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C} |
| 8456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c} |
| 8457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C} |
| 8458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c} |
| 8459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}} |
| 8460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}} |
| 8461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}} |
| 8462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}} |
| 8463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}} |
| 8464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}} |
| 8465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}} |
| 8466 |
| 8467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E} |
| 8468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e} |
| 8469 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}} |
| 8470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}} |
| 8471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}} |
| 8472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}} |
| 8473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}} |
| 8474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}} |
| 8475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G} |
| 8476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g} |
| 8477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}} |
| 8478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}} |
| 8479 |
| 8480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}} |
| 8481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}} |
| 8482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H} |
| 8483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h} |
| 8484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I} |
| 8485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}} |
| 8486 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I} |
| 8487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}} |
| 8488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}} |
| 8489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}} |
| 8490 |
| 8491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}} |
| 8492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}} |
| 8493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ} |
| 8494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij} |
| 8495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J} |
| 8496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}} |
| 8497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L} |
| 8498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l} |
| 8499 |
| 8500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L} |
| 8501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l} |
| 8502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N} |
| 8503 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n} |
| 8504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}} |
| 8505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}} |
| 8506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O} |
| 8507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o} |
| 8508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}} |
| 8509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}} |
| 8510 |
| 8511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}} |
| 8512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}} |
| 8513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE} |
| 8514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe} |
| 8515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R} |
| 8516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r} |
| 8517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}} |
| 8518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}} |
| 8519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S} |
| 8520 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s} |
| 8521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S} |
| 8522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s} |
| 8523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}} |
| 8524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}} |
| 8525 |
| 8526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}} |
| 8527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}} |
| 8528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}} |
| 8529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}} |
| 8530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}} |
| 8531 |
| 8532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U} |
| 8533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u} |
| 8534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U} |
| 8535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u} |
| 8536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}} |
| 8537 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}} |
| 8538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}} |
| 8539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}} |
| 8540 |
| 8541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}} |
| 8542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}} |
| 8543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W} |
| 8544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w} |
| 8545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y} |
| 8546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y} |
| 8547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y} |
| 8548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z} |
| 8549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z} |
| 8550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}} |
| 8551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}} |
| 8552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}} |
| 8553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}} |
| 8554 |
| 8555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}} |
| 8556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}} |
| 8557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}} |
| 8558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ} |
| 8559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj} |
| 8560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj} |
| 8561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ} |
| 8562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj} |
| 8563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj} |
| 8564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}} |
| 8565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}} |
| 8566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}} |
| 8567 |
| 8568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}} |
| 8569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}} |
| 8570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}} |
| 8571 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}} |
| 8572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}} |
| 8573 |
| 8574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}} |
| 8575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}} |
| 8576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}} |
| 8577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}} |
| 8578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}} |
| 8579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}} |
| 8580 |
| 8581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}} |
| 8582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ} |
| 8583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz} |
| 8584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz} |
| 8585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G} |
| 8586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g} |
| 8587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N} |
| 8588 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n} |
| 8589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}} |
| 8590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}} |
| 8591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}} |
| 8592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}} |
| 8593 |
| 8594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}} |
| 8595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}} |
| 8596 |
| 8597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}} |
| 8598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}} |
| 8599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}} |
| 8600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}} |
| 8601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}} |
| 8602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}} |
| 8603 |
| 8604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y} |
| 8605 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y} |
| 8606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}} |
| 8607 |
| 8608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }} |
| 8609 |
| 8610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}} |
| 8611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}} |
| 8612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}} |
| 8613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}} |
| 8614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}} |
| 8615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}} |
| 8616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}} |
| 8617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}} |
| 8618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}} |
| 8619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}} |
| 8620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}} |
| 8621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}} |
| 8622 |
| 8623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}} |
| 8624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}} |
| 8625 |
| 8626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G} |
| 8627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g} |
| 8628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}} |
| 8629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}} |
| 8630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}} |
| 8631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}} |
| 8632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H} |
| 8633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h} |
| 8634 |
| 8635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K} |
| 8636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k} |
| 8637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}} |
| 8638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}} |
| 8639 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}} |
| 8640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}} |
| 8641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}} |
| 8642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}} |
| 8643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}} |
| 8644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}} |
| 8645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M} |
| 8646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m} |
| 8647 |
| 8648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}} |
| 8649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}} |
| 8650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}} |
| 8651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}} |
| 8652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}} |
| 8653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}} |
| 8654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}} |
| 8655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}} |
| 8656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}} |
| 8657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}} |
| 8658 |
| 8659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P} |
| 8660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p} |
| 8661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}} |
| 8662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}} |
| 8663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}} |
| 8664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}} |
| 8665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}} |
| 8666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}} |
| 8667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}} |
| 8668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}} |
| 8669 |
| 8670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}} |
| 8671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}} |
| 8672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}} |
| 8673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}} |
| 8674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}} |
| 8675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}} |
| 8676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}} |
| 8677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}} |
| 8678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}} |
| 8679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}} |
| 8680 |
| 8681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V} |
| 8682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v} |
| 8683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}} |
| 8684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}} |
| 8685 |
| 8686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W} |
| 8687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w} |
| 8688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W} |
| 8689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w} |
| 8690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W} |
| 8691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w} |
| 8692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}} |
| 8693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}} |
| 8694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}} |
| 8695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}} |
| 8696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}} |
| 8697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}} |
| 8698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X} |
| 8699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x} |
| 8700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}} |
| 8701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}} |
| 8702 |
| 8703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z} |
| 8704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z} |
| 8705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}} |
| 8706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}} |
| 8707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}} |
| 8708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}} |
| 8709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}} |
| 8710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t} |
| 8711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}} |
| 8712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}} |
| 8713 |
| 8714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}} |
| 8715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}} |
| 8716 |
| 8717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}} |
| 8718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}} |
| 8719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E} |
| 8720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e} |
| 8721 |
| 8722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}} |
| 8723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}} |
| 8724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}} |
| 8725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}} |
| 8726 |
| 8727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}} |
| 8728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}} |
| 8729 |
| 8730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y} |
| 8731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y} |
| 8732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}} |
| 8733 |
| 8734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y} |
| 8735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y} |
| 8736 |
| 8737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--} |
| 8738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---} |
| 8739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft} |
| 8740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright} |
| 8741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase} |
| 8742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft} |
| 8743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright} |
| 8744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase} |
| 8745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet} |
| 8746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots} |
| 8747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft} |
| 8748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright} |
| 8749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro} |
| 8750 |
| 8751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion} |
| 8752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result} |
| 8753 |
| 8754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus} |
| 8755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point} |
| 8756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv} |
| 8757 }% end of \utfeightchardefs |
| 8758 |
| 8759 |
| 8760 % US-ASCII character definitions. |
| 8761 \def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done |
| 8762 \relax |
| 8763 } |
| 8764 |
| 8765 % Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with |
| 8766 % existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a |
| 8767 % document encoding. |
| 8768 % |
| 8769 \setnonasciicharscatcode \other |
| 8770 |
| 8771 |
| 8772 \message{formatting,} |
| 8773 |
| 8774 \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt |
| 8775 |
| 8776 \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
| 8777 \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt |
| 8778 \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt |
| 8779 |
| 8780 % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. |
| 8781 \vbadness = 10000 |
| 8782 |
| 8783 % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. |
| 8784 \hbadness = 2000 |
| 8785 |
| 8786 % Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. |
| 8787 \widowpenalty=10000 |
| 8788 \clubpenalty=10000 |
| 8789 |
| 8790 % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're |
| 8791 % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of |
| 8792 % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on |
| 8793 % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. |
| 8794 % |
| 8795 \def\setemergencystretch{% |
| 8796 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined |
| 8797 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. |
| 8798 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% |
| 8799 \else |
| 8800 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize |
| 8801 \fi |
| 8802 } |
| 8803 |
| 8804 % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; |
| 8805 % 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; |
| 8806 % 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. |
| 8807 % |
| 8808 % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define |
| 8809 % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. |
| 8810 % |
| 8811 \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% |
| 8812 \voffset = #3\relax |
| 8813 \topskip = #6\relax |
| 8814 \splittopskip = \topskip |
| 8815 % |
| 8816 \vsize = #1\relax |
| 8817 \advance\vsize by \topskip |
| 8818 \outervsize = \vsize |
| 8819 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin |
| 8820 \pageheight = \vsize |
| 8821 % |
| 8822 \hsize = #2\relax |
| 8823 \outerhsize = \hsize |
| 8824 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
| 8825 \pagewidth = \hsize |
| 8826 % |
| 8827 \normaloffset = #4\relax |
| 8828 \bindingoffset = #5\relax |
| 8829 % |
| 8830 \ifpdf |
| 8831 \pdfpageheight #7\relax |
| 8832 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax |
| 8833 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of |
| 8834 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. |
| 8835 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in |
| 8836 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in |
| 8837 \fi |
| 8838 % |
| 8839 \setleading{\textleading} |
| 8840 % |
| 8841 \parindent = \defaultparindent |
| 8842 \setemergencystretch |
| 8843 } |
| 8844 |
| 8845 % @letterpaper (the default). |
| 8846 \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| 8847 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
| 8848 \textleading = 13.2pt |
| 8849 % |
| 8850 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. |
| 8851 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines |
| 8852 {\voffset}{.25in}% |
| 8853 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% |
| 8854 {11in}{8.5in}% |
| 8855 }} |
| 8856 |
| 8857 % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. |
| 8858 \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| 8859 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt |
| 8860 \textleading = 12pt |
| 8861 % |
| 8862 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% |
| 8863 {-.2in}{0in}% |
| 8864 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% |
| 8865 {9.25in}{7in}% |
| 8866 % |
| 8867 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in |
| 8868 \tolerance = 700 |
| 8869 \hfuzz = 1pt |
| 8870 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
| 8871 \defbodyindent = .5cm |
| 8872 }} |
| 8873 |
| 8874 % Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. |
| 8875 % (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) |
| 8876 \def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| 8877 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt |
| 8878 \textleading = 12pt |
| 8879 % |
| 8880 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% |
| 8881 {-.2in}{-.4in}% |
| 8882 {0pt}{14pt}% |
| 8883 {9in}{6in}% |
| 8884 % |
| 8885 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in |
| 8886 \tolerance = 700 |
| 8887 \hfuzz = 1pt |
| 8888 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
| 8889 \defbodyindent = .4cm |
| 8890 }} |
| 8891 |
| 8892 % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. |
| 8893 \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| 8894 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
| 8895 \textleading = 13.2pt |
| 8896 % |
| 8897 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 |
| 8898 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. |
| 8899 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust |
| 8900 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then |
| 8901 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in |
| 8902 % your texinfo source file like this: |
| 8903 % @tex |
| 8904 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm |
| 8905 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm |
| 8906 % @end tex |
| 8907 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines |
| 8908 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% |
| 8909 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% |
| 8910 {297mm}{210mm}% |
| 8911 % |
| 8912 \tolerance = 700 |
| 8913 \hfuzz = 1pt |
| 8914 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
| 8915 \defbodyindent = 5mm |
| 8916 }} |
| 8917 |
| 8918 % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. |
| 8919 % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. |
| 8920 % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. |
| 8921 \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| 8922 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt |
| 8923 \textleading = 12.5pt |
| 8924 % |
| 8925 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% |
| 8926 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% |
| 8927 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% |
| 8928 {210mm}{148mm}% |
| 8929 % |
| 8930 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in |
| 8931 \tolerance = 800 |
| 8932 \hfuzz = 1.2pt |
| 8933 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
| 8934 \defbodyindent = 2mm |
| 8935 \tableindent = 12mm |
| 8936 }} |
| 8937 |
| 8938 % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. |
| 8939 \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| 8940 \afourpaper |
| 8941 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% |
| 8942 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% |
| 8943 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% |
| 8944 {297mm}{210mm}% |
| 8945 % |
| 8946 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. |
| 8947 \globaldefs = 0 |
| 8948 }} |
| 8949 |
| 8950 % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. |
| 8951 \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 |
| 8952 \afourpaper |
| 8953 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% |
| 8954 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% |
| 8955 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% |
| 8956 {297mm}{210mm}% |
| 8957 \globaldefs = 0 |
| 8958 }} |
| 8959 |
| 8960 % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] |
| 8961 % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, |
| 8962 % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. |
| 8963 % |
| 8964 \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} |
| 8965 \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% |
| 8966 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi |
| 8967 \globaldefs = 1 |
| 8968 % |
| 8969 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
| 8970 \setleading{\textleading}% |
| 8971 % |
| 8972 \dimen0 = #1\relax |
| 8973 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset |
| 8974 % |
| 8975 \dimen2 = \hsize |
| 8976 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset |
| 8977 % |
| 8978 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% |
| 8979 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% |
| 8980 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% |
| 8981 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% |
| 8982 }} |
| 8983 |
| 8984 % Set default to letter. |
| 8985 % |
| 8986 \letterpaper |
| 8987 |
| 8988 |
| 8989 \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} |
| 8990 |
| 8991 % DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. |
| 8992 \catcode`\^^? = 14 |
| 8993 |
| 8994 % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. |
| 8995 \catcode`\"=\other |
| 8996 \catcode`\~=\other |
| 8997 \catcode`\^=\other |
| 8998 \catcode`\_=\other |
| 8999 \catcode`\|=\other |
| 9000 \catcode`\<=\other |
| 9001 \catcode`\>=\other |
| 9002 \catcode`\+=\other |
| 9003 \catcode`\$=\other |
| 9004 \def\normaldoublequote{"} |
| 9005 \def\normaltilde{~} |
| 9006 \def\normalcaret{^} |
| 9007 \def\normalunderscore{_} |
| 9008 \def\normalverticalbar{|} |
| 9009 \def\normalless{<} |
| 9010 \def\normalgreater{>} |
| 9011 \def\normalplus{+} |
| 9012 \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix |
| 9013 |
| 9014 % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt |
| 9015 % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, |
| 9016 % where something hairier probably needs to be done. |
| 9017 % |
| 9018 % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print |
| 9019 % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero |
| 9020 % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all |
| 9021 % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. |
| 9022 % |
| 9023 \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
| 9024 |
| 9025 % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches |
| 9026 % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from |
| 9027 % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway |
| 9028 % this is not a problem. |
| 9029 \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
| 9030 |
| 9031 % Turn off all special characters except @ |
| 9032 % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). |
| 9033 % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can |
| 9034 % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. |
| 9035 |
| 9036 \catcode`\"=\active |
| 9037 \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} |
| 9038 \let"=\activedoublequote |
| 9039 \catcode`\~=\active |
| 9040 \def~{{\tt\char126}} |
| 9041 \chardef\hat=`\^ |
| 9042 \catcode`\^=\active |
| 9043 \def^{{\tt \hat}} |
| 9044 |
| 9045 \catcode`\_=\active |
| 9046 \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} |
| 9047 \let\realunder=_ |
| 9048 % Subroutine for the previous macro. |
| 9049 \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } |
| 9050 |
| 9051 \catcode`\|=\active |
| 9052 \def|{{\tt\char124}} |
| 9053 \chardef \less=`\< |
| 9054 \catcode`\<=\active |
| 9055 \def<{{\tt \less}} |
| 9056 \chardef \gtr=`\> |
| 9057 \catcode`\>=\active |
| 9058 \def>{{\tt \gtr}} |
| 9059 \catcode`\+=\active |
| 9060 \def+{{\tt \char 43}} |
| 9061 \catcode`\$=\active |
| 9062 \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix |
| 9063 |
| 9064 % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file |
| 9065 % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. |
| 9066 % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. |
| 9067 % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. |
| 9068 \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} |
| 9069 |
| 9070 % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after |
| 9071 % parsing them. |
| 9072 \def\turnoffactive{% |
| 9073 \normalturnoffactive |
| 9074 \otherbackslash |
| 9075 } |
| 9076 |
| 9077 \catcode`\@=0 |
| 9078 |
| 9079 % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, |
| 9080 % as in \char`\\. |
| 9081 \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ |
| 9082 \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work |
| 9083 |
| 9084 % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and |
| 9085 % \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). |
| 9086 {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} |
| 9087 |
| 9088 % In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash |
| 9089 % in fixed width font. |
| 9090 \catcode`\\=\active |
| 9091 @def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}} |
| 9092 % On startup, @fixbackslash assigns: |
| 9093 % @let \ = @normalbackslash |
| 9094 |
| 9095 % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. |
| 9096 % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with |
| 9097 % catcode other. |
| 9098 @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} |
| 9099 @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} |
| 9100 |
| 9101 % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of |
| 9102 % the literal character `\'. |
| 9103 % |
| 9104 @def@normalturnoffactive{% |
| 9105 @let\=@normalbackslash |
| 9106 @let"=@normaldoublequote |
| 9107 @let~=@normaltilde |
| 9108 @let^=@normalcaret |
| 9109 @let_=@normalunderscore |
| 9110 @let|=@normalverticalbar |
| 9111 @let<=@normalless |
| 9112 @let>=@normalgreater |
| 9113 @let+=@normalplus |
| 9114 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix |
| 9115 @markupsetuplqdefault |
| 9116 @markupsetuprqdefault |
| 9117 @unsepspaces |
| 9118 } |
| 9119 |
| 9120 % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. |
| 9121 % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. |
| 9122 @otherifyactive |
| 9123 |
| 9124 % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. |
| 9125 % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing |
| 9126 % a backslash. |
| 9127 % |
| 9128 @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} |
| 9129 @global@let\ = @eatinput |
| 9130 |
| 9131 % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then |
| 9132 % the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix |
| 9133 % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. |
| 9134 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input |
| 9135 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. |
| 9136 % |
| 9137 @gdef@fixbackslash{% |
| 9138 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi |
| 9139 @catcode`+=@active |
| 9140 @catcode`@_=@active |
| 9141 } |
| 9142 |
| 9143 % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. |
| 9144 @escapechar = `@@ |
| 9145 |
| 9146 % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. |
| 9147 @catcode`@& = @other |
| 9148 @catcode`@# = @other |
| 9149 @catcode`@% = @other |
| 9150 |
| 9151 @c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and |
| 9152 @c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we |
| 9153 @c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. |
| 9154 @c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. |
| 9155 @catcode`@'=@active |
| 9156 @catcode`@`=@active |
| 9157 @markupsetuplqdefault |
| 9158 @markupsetuprqdefault |
| 9159 |
| 9160 @c Local variables: |
| 9161 @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) |
| 9162 @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" |
| 9163 @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" |
| 9164 @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" |
| 9165 @c time-stamp-end: "}" |
| 9166 @c End: |
| 9167 |
| 9168 @c vim:sw=2: |
| 9169 |
| 9170 @ignore |
| 9171 arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 |
| 9172 @end ignore |
OLD | NEW |